JP6689351B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as is seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out when a big hit is won.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of the game ball to the starting opening. Then, when a game ball is won at the starting opening, a lottery process is carried out in which a big hit or the like is lottered. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time on a predetermined display device. Then, when a predetermined variation time has passed, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing that the big hit is won, a special game in which a lot of prize balls are paid out to the player is performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a main body frame that is detachably supported from the front side and is attached to an island facility or the like of a game hall directly or through an outer frame, and the front surface of the main body frame is opened and closed A door frame having a game window facing the game area of the game board is provided, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided on the door frame to enhance the decoration effect and entertain the player. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-195354, A

  However, such a conventional gaming machine has a low appealing power to the player, and there is a concern that the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the interest of gaming.

Means 1:
A game board having a game area in which a game ball is hit by the operation of the player,
A main body frame that detachably supports the game board,
A door frame having a game window in which at least the game area of the game board supported by the main body frame is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the front surface of the main body frame and faces the player side,
Dish light emitting decoration means that is formed below the game window and has a dish portion that bulges forward and can store the game balls, and a light emitting decoration portion that can perform light emission decoration,
A ball feeding unit that sends the game balls stored in the plate portion to a launch position through a passage opening,
Launching means capable of launching the game balls sent to the launching position by the ball feeding unit toward the game area one by one in a launch path ,
First light emitting decoration means which is provided in the vicinity of the plate light emitting decoration means, decorates a predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window, and is capable of emitting light toward the player side,
An area different from the predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window is decorated, and a second light emitting decoration means having a bulge portion that bulges forward of the first light emission decoration means and is capable of emitting light,
The decoration by the dish light emitting decoration means and the decoration by the second light emitting decoration means form an integral decoration,
The dish light emitting decoration means is formed by bulging further forward than the bulging portion of the second light emitting decoration means,
At least a part of the bulging portion of the second light emitting decoration means is extended to the inside of the game window that allows the game area to be viewed,
The second light emitting decoration means has an inner side surface portion that is easily visible to the player facing the game board, and an outer side surface portion that is difficult to see from the player facing the game board,
The inner side surface portion is decorated in an inclined shape toward the peripheral portion of the game area, and is formed to be a gentle angle compared to the angle of the outer side surface portion toward the main body frame side,
The ball feed unit comprises a fraud prevention member made of a metal plate material,
The metal plate member has a first plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on one side with a predetermined dividing line as a boundary, and a second plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on the other side with the dividing line as a boundary, The first plate surface portion is bent with respect to the second plate surface portion, and a substantially V-shaped gap that gradually narrows toward the end point of the dividing line is provided between the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion. By forming and allowing the wire rod attached to the game ball to enter the gap and cut at the end point of the dividing line, it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts using the wire rod,
The passage opening is an opening formed on the outer surface of the ball feeding unit, and has a first opening having a size through which the game ball can pass and a second opening having a size through which the game ball cannot pass ,
The second opening is an opening formed continuously from the first opening such that the end point of the dividing line is located at the second opening,
The bent first plate surface part of the first plate surface part and the second plate surface part in which the dividing line is located in the second opening and the gap is formed using the dividing line. However, by arranging the metal plate member in the ball feeding unit so that it is closer to the launch passage than the second plate surface portion, the game ball passing through the first opening is the first plate surface portion and the second plate. A game machine characterized in that, in addition to being less likely to collide with the plate surface portion, the wire rod can easily enter the gap .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main body frame was opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame was opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame base substrate cover and a wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the upper decoration unit from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and saw the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the site | part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front after disassembling, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, and (D). FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing a relation among a payout passage, a payout motor, and a payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation path of the sphere in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen after. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall portion of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 103. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 taken in the vertical direction. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front component member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like as viewed from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 106. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the pivotal side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the rear side in the state where the game board was stored in the body frame. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally backward. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit for every main member and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 4th unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the 4th unit in an attacker unit. It is a front view which cuts and shows a part of attacker unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the front side unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front side unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory diagonally from the upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center accessory from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right inside production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right middle production unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled 2nd embodiment of the fixed decorative body in the front right inside production unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 that is disassembled and then seen. (A) is a perspective view of the front cover and effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from a position slightly left to the front, (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further left than in (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the effect sheet in the fixed ornament of FIG. 141, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of light-out, (c) shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of blue lighting. It is explanatory drawing and (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration mode at the time of red lighting. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and saw from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and it looked at after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back horizontal production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit, and was seen after. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the front right center production unit in the front unit in the front unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front-right-middle movable decorative body of the front-right-middle rendering unit in a normal position as seen from slightly above, and (b) is a front view when the front-right middle movable decorative body is in the appearance position. It is a perspective view seen from slightly above. It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back horizontal production unit in the back unit. It is the front view of the game board which shows the movement of the back side production unit and the back side production unit in the back unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) shows interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the special design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit judging processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in the lottery process for big hits, (b) is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for big hits on the first special symbol side, (c) is the second special symbol side Is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS steady-state processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a symbol determination table for determining the type (type) of the small hit. 6 is a time chart showing an example of control on the main control MPU side and control on the peripheral control MPU side when a big hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode). Under certain conditions (battle mode), although the big hit is lost (miss), the time showing an example of the control on the main control MPU side when the small win is won and the control on the peripheral control MPU side It is a chart. It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under specific conditions (battle mode). It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under specific conditions (battle mode). It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under specific conditions (battle mode). It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under specific conditions (battle mode). It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under specific conditions (battle mode). It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under specific conditions (battle mode). (A) is an effect content determination table for a big hit, and (b) is an effect content determination table for a small hit (special loss). It is a figure showing the degree of expectation (winning rate) etc. for every character which appears in high expectation production. It is a figure which shows the appearance rate of the character according to the movement (light emission color) of the special winning opening which appears in high expectation production. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening (closed state) of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening (open state) of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit on the second special symbol side in the second embodiment, and (b) is a type (type) of the small hit in the second embodiment. It is a symbol determination table for determining. It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode) in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode) in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production contents of high expectation production when a big hit or a small hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode) in the second embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a game machine (pachinko machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame that form the pachinko machine viewed from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame, and the game board that form the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 pivotably supported to open and close the front side. A box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and in which a game ball as a game medium is hit, a front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. On the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and each of the left and right Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

  In the pachinko machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 is projected forward below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hit ball strength according to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to insert a hand or the like into the game ball 1 or the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 110), the various winning holes, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided, and the frame members 10, 11, 12, and 13 are connected by the connecting members 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and the upper and lower parts are substantially centered in the front-rear direction on the left and right ends. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided that penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The projection 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance the strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, a worker's The pachinko machine 1 becomes a finger rest so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the design of the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

  In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is the engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state in which the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 while being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the four connecting members 14 connect the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to each other. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged so as to support the lower surface of the lower metal support member 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the metal reinforcing member 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projection. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the supporting hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is enhanced by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped supporting protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-like protrusion protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the supporting protrusion 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably attached and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the supporting projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a is formed. The state where the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and it is in a state of abutting. In the normal axial support state, the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c that is formed by bending, respectively. The centers are offset from each other in an oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633, which supports the heavy body frame 3, is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the above, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, when the operating portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d by acting force F in the direction in which it is removed along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is A component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. Keep it sandwiched between the inner surface and one side To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) away from the support projection piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of being further disengaged, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

  Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 is directed to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock member 27 is locked. The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. I'm confirming.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivotal support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivotal support fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 to be pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16 (C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to fix the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily nail the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form the wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the insides of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be wide when viewed from the front, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large at the same time that the can be attached to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fastened in close contact with the inner member and the connecting member 14 is fastened with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 engaged with each other, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, Adjacent ball lending machine) can be attached closely.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the right rear side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame seen from the back.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a gaming frame 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape in a slightly vertically elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided with a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating through the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Mounted on the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example has a door having a game window 101 formed in a vertically long rectangular outer shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical inner periphery. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to a lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 covers the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower portion of the game window 101 with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction (open side) in rear view. ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. The handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. The door frame is arranged on the opposite side of the handlebar relay substrate cover 193 and the firing cover 191 and the handle device relay substrate 192 with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched (on the right side from the center in the left-right direction (shaft support side) in rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally rotatably supported rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 of the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also provided with a peripheral controller provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and is provided with an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring cord 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay substrate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like with the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, and the like is located on the right side (axis) of the door frame base substrate 194 in rear view. After being bundled together in the position of the (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular notch 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

  In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and the ball feeding unit 580 are mounted and fixed. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball that penetrates the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 in a predetermined position in the front-rear direction and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 that is obliquely inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface that is located in the lower right corner in front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-back direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114, and through which wiring from the handle device 500 can pass, and a handle. Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. From the board mounting portion 118 which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base board 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 to the front side on the rear side. The glass unit supporting step 110a that can contact the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game window 101 and the glass unit locking member 190 that can be rotated rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from a lower side thereof by a predetermined amount, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the pachinko machine 1 has an enhanced security function. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has mounting portions 110g for mounting the speaker brackets 132 for mounting the side speakers 130 and mounting holes 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker covers 338 at appropriate positions, respectively. Has been formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which a front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent it and prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 have an intersection point of their central axes in a front view from a center of the game area 1100 by a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1). 0.5 m) is obliquely fixed so that a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can receive sound most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible, and the left and right sides are arranged. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output sounds with a high sense of stereo.

  The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched between the substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, so that the door frame is closed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, and the rear side of the rear side has a vertical direction. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section, as shown in FIGS. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three upper and lower in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, an end portion on a side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically aligned with a step 195a on a rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof, and is bundled in a predetermined pair in the holding holes 197a which are paired up and down. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Accordingly, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in the direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is rotatably supported on the rear surface and part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, and the like due to being pinched or pinched.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when force is applied via the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to make it difficult to shake in the vertical direction, and it is possible to surely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent a problem from occurring.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. When the wiring 196 hangs down, the wiring 196 is caught by another member and is disconnected. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control section 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electric device and the door side. Each decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as an electric device, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by the wire, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and broken, or the connector from coming off. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent in accordance with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, a conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-213675) is used. The wiring 196 does not slide as in the case of), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197 arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by being guided, the main body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the side edge of the door frame 5 which is pivotally supported is increased. The door frame 5 can be used as the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention property against fraud.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 is wired by the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wiring 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since the pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unnecessary force is exerted on the wiring 196, etc. to cause a problem such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted when the door frame 5 is closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 can be almost prevented from protruding from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), it is possible to easily rotate the wiring holding member 197 by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to surely achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. Can be held to hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100, and the pachinko machine 1 having the large game board 4 can attract the player's attention strongly. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the shaft of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500, which is supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state, is also inclined in the same manner.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper surface and a lower surface thereof on upper and lower ends of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 that is bent rearward and extends in the vertical direction at the center of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is provided so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long sides thereof.

  The shaft-supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, so that If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. In addition, the U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the body frame 3 described later is inserted into the C-shape (FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, prevent only the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 from bending, and improve the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side part thereof has an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention rear projection 182 projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projections 183 projecting rearward along the end shape. Note that the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the right side (the pivotal support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear side longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, a crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to be fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime prevention projection 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half open side thereof is forward. The inner member 1110 of the component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. Thereby, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be blocked by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  Note that the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the ball guide path formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface of the security cover 180 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of a ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower rear outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, and the fraudulent act. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more safe against such problems.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw at the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and this ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

  The firing cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

  As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed along with the arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 forming an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and having a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. A right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and on which a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted, and a side inner on the lower side Rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and lower right side decorative substrate 216 which are arranged below the substantially center in the vertical direction of the lens 212 and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. The right ring that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the decorative board 214 on the right side. An upper decorative board cover 218 and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right lower lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right lower lower decorative board 216 are provided. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the front side of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. In addition, the decoration boards 214, 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a are driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of the present example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a circumferential lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210a divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens section 210b composed of a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can diffuse light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down of the pachinko machine 1 widely. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses in a mountain portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by means of a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and in cooperation with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side, the right side decoration unit 200 has a glittering appearance. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

  The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LEDs 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, which causes noise to other pachinko machines. It's becoming difficult. As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the ridges protruding forward in the wrinkle-shaped portion. Therefore, light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photograph of a light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit.

  As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetric with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and between the large window frames 242a. Frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large And a frame-shaped upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246, which is fitted into the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a supported from the rear lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 and fitted into the large window frames 242a, 244a from the rear side. Inner decoration member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a, and a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decoration member 251. A plurality of bands arranged in the center of the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the substantially center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decoration substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration substrate 256. Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 arranged in front of the side inner lens 252 and in an upper right portion in front view, and a transparent member attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252 for supporting the upper left speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 is made of a translucent and milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of each of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b with the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 penetrating in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decoration member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and then to the rear of the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decorative unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is appropriately emitted to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to emit light.

  The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small portion arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, which correspond to each other.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in a front view, which is continuous from the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101. It is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side decoration frame 244 extends along the game window 101 and penetrates in the front-rear direction with two large window frames 244a, and a small oval frame that is disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. ing.

  In the side decoration frame 244, the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the side decoration frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, which correspond to each other. The upper side decoration frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  In addition, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side and the rear lens portion 250a is recessed rearward. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and also in the width direction so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. Further, the inner decoration member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251 a in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion part 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the belt-shaped lenses extend in the front side. The decorative member 251 is configured to intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction of the slit 251a.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is diffused and refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. As shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion parts 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left-side decorative unit 240 are provided with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and are large in size of the lower-side decorative frame 242 and the upper-side decorative frame 244. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) it is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is adapted to be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper backside of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 from being broken and an unauthorized tool being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and it is difficult for the other pachinko machines to make noise.

  Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 having the curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left inner decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion part 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). Thus, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the peripheral lens portion 250a side (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is emitted to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the respective shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersects with the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights of different shades that extend in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersect the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

  The upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a that penetrates in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the central frame 281a in a slender shape to the left and right, and tapers toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed behind the upper central lens 284. A plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 in which a plurality of fine prisms are formed, an annular lens supporting member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusing lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens supporting member 286. Of the lens support member 286 and a light blocking member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens supporting member 286, and a rear portion of the light blocking member 287 disposed at a position corresponding to the inner side of the tubular portion 287a of the light blocking member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tubular portion 287a and an upper central decorative substrate 288 mounted on the front surface.

  In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. Of the upper side decorative substrate 290, a substrate cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear portion of the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 have a large light-transmitting property and have a predetermined size. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. .

  In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 glitters by the light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of radially extending belt-shaped lenses are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the extension frame lens portion 282c has a front surface centered on the axial center of the through hole 282a. A plurality of concentric circularly extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lens of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted, so that the rear surface is clear. Is not visible to.

  Further, the upper central decoration substrate 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decoration substrate 290 can appropriately light the LEDs 290a to lighten and decorate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281.

[1-2E. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. When the upper plate main body 312 and the upper plate main body 312 are covered with the plate-shaped upper plate main body 312 which is fixed to approximately the center of the front surface and which is open at the upper and rear sides and bulges toward the front on the left side (shaft support side), the front end is the front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower side of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left-right center to the lower surface on the right side, and a plate-like substrate mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface, and is mounted below the substrate mounting base 320. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate body 312, and the upper and the rear are opened, and the center in the left-right direction swells to the front in the front view and the front end extends to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right when viewed from the front. A lower dish cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and a right side of the lower dish cover 328 at the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 are decorated on the right side, and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower dish cover 328 is provided. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 includes an obliquely extending lower plate upper left side cover 332 that covers the left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. Lower plate left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and which can transmit sound, A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered by the upper plate front decorative member 316.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. A cover body 339 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate body 312 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and the lower plate body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface, and the plate unit base 310 are installed on the upper left side in a front view and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction below the opening 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) near the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e, and is fitted to the lower plate body 324 and the rear ends of the lower plate top plates 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g which is arranged in the lower part to the right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and which penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined lower in the front end direction in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish main body 312 becomes larger toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 is increased. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are Since it is impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the front upper plate 301, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls there. The direction is changed, and it is guided so as to roll to the right in the front view in the guide recess 310j, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself to a game ball driving operation or a game with a game ball that has been driven, and thereby reducing the interest in the game, and increasing the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

  The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k that widens to the left when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging from occurring in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games can be played. The balls can be fed into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. In the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls, which are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, are supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed), so that the static electricity charged in the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

  The upper plate front portion decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle, It is formed in a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decoration member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316, and has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the feeling of distance is not fixed.

  The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved in a spindle shape like the right side portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316. It is formed integrally with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removing button 341 of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which allows light to be diffused and refracted so that the player cannot clearly see the lower side. There is. In addition, the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that is fan-shaped in the front view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and the upper surface of the bottom plate 324a is formed to have the lowest center, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver-colored plating layer on the surface thereof, which has a metallic feeling (a matte state such as sandblasted rather than a mirror surface). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Is provided with a plate-shaped portion. The opening portion 334a of the lower left bottom cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 described later so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower cover 334 is made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted inside.

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, a bottom plate side cover 330 and a bottom plate left lower cover 334 close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction. The bottom surface between them is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper bowl ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removal button 341 which is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341. And the operation piece 342 that is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front surface side of the dish unit base 310, and the operation piece 342 is operably (rotatably) supported and also the dish unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 which is provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and includes an upper plate ball removing slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

  The upper bowl ball removing base 344 of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and, at the same time, communicates with the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and a ball guiding flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and has passed through the opening 344a and then guides it backward (FIGS. 42 and 42). 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c in which the game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is designed to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

  In addition, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal side is in communication with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is connected. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

  In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b. After that, it is discharged from the ball removal port 581b to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper dish ball pulling slider 343, whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, and therefore the ball pulling member 583. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition part 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are provided. It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is disposed between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334 below the lower dish body 324, and forms a lower plate central portion of the dish unit 300. The opening base 351 and the plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening / closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 are rotated. And a lower plate ball removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 slidably in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removing slider 353. There is.

  This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially match the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which penetrates in the up-down direction. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 to close the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a. ..

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removing slider 353, and the abutment pin abuts the lower dish ball removing slider 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Is able to.

  In addition, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 is substantially aligned with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

  This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides rearward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

  Then, as the open / close shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355 to hold the slide. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly retracted and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. It is held in a state of being matched with the extraction hole 3324b, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removing button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower plate ball removing slide 353 to release the lower plate. The ball-sliding slide 353 is slidable, and the opening / closing shutter 352 is biased by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. It returns to the position of the closed state that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.

  It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper plate 301 of the dish, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card can be returned after subtracting the balance of the loan. There is. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan remaining display portion 363, and a loan remaining display portion 363 arranged behind the front cover 365 and the ball rental button 361. And a ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch that is operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and a rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached thereto. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and is formed between the button openings 310m. The transparent front cover 365 is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the cover 365 and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, respectively. The lending balance display portion 363 arranged on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has a ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the ball-renting unit 360 includes a protrusion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player's side) from the outer circumference of the ball-renting button 361 and the return button 362. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be used as a pachinko machine 1 having two storage plates and having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation section of the operation unit in a pressed state.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of hitting the game ball with respect to the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass therethrough. And a lower cover 424 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and is formed in a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted thereon at the position corresponding to the ring and fixed to the lower side of the operation section holding member 416, and detecting the rotation of the dial operation section 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

  The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction, and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a collar portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a coupling locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the coupling locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operating portion 401 is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, which will be described in detail later. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to have a large contact area when they abut each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating vertically is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower portion of the outer periphery and protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b of the operation portion holding member 416 are provided. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) is prevented from rotating inside the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of a gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

  In addition, the button body 406 is provided with a pressure detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower portion of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Thereby, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a circular ring-shaped sliding surface that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detecting pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detecting pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

  The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, it is possible to click the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to add a feeling.

  Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (lock projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom center of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). And the rotation detecting sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. 2a and 432b can pass through, an opening 416e which is pressed from above by a pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b in the up-down direction, and downward from the bottom. And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extension button decoration substrate 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a predetermined gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and locks the button. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically penetrates the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward at least for accommodating the driven gear 410 are provided. I have it. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

  In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper concave portion 420c and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g, which are different from the outside of the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for protruding the dial decoration board 430 to be mounted. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes, etc. at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions with respect to each other. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on its top plate. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1) and has its lower end protruding outward. I have it. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from slipping upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  In the upper cover 422, the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below with the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass therethrough, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially matching the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and the leg portion of the base member 420 is located at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the bottom portion. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit of the dish unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the length of the rotation detection piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It is said that. Thereby, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described in detail later. . Further, the operation unit 400 causes the dial operation unit 401 to rotate in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation part 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protruding part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely set for the player. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation part 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation part 401, and if the pressing operation part 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation part 401 will be inevitably hit, and thus the operation part. The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the impact of hitting from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Since it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, it is possible to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Door can be.

  In addition, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300) causes an impact. Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impacts and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and avoid the concentration of the impacts and the like, and to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300. Can be increased.

  Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is abutted against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c and impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405, the leg portion 420e is not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The part supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operation section 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operation section holding member 416 holding the dial operation section 401 comes off the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation section 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and the position of the rotary shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is aptly set to the dial operating unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be made eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

  Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is made smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation portion holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from 401, the dial operation portion 401 can abut the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation portion 401 can It can be surely prevented from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation portion 401 and the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial drive motor 414 frequently rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the amount of heat generation is increased due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated / dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and to prevent the dial drive means 414 from operating. It will be possible to withstand high loads It can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressing of the pressing operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with which the player can experience, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by entertaining the player. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation sections 401 and 405 are provided, the operation sections 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated, so that the operation sections 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step section 407a of the pressing operation section 405 and the protruding section 401f of the dial operation section 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation section 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation portion 401 by repeating forward / reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, thereby vibrating the dial operation portion 401 through the step portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation portion 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axis center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation portion 405, the dial drive is performed. Even if the motor 414 drives the dial operation unit 401 to rotate, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from attempting to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, it is possible for the player to perform a dial operation in the operation unit 400. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to easily entertain the player using the operation unit 400 and guide the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405. It is possible for the player to easily read the letters “PUSH” displayed without turning or tilting greatly, and the pressing operation is performed on the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  Further, the dial operation portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the operation unit 400 can be provided through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it becomes difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the foreign matter and for the pressing operation unit 405 to be pressed. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, the contact portion in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation portion 401 is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position biased to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation portion 405), the dial operation portion 401 is surely brought into contact. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower in the direction of the rotation axis center of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where it is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward / reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported on the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the plate unit 300 has a high strength and rigidity in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. As shown in the drawing, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is mounted on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape; A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the rear handle body 504.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the handle body is rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and that has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery; a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510; and a detection shaft portion 512a that is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. The rotational position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Urging to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and bulges rearward and has a rear end portion that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of this example is configured to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to No. 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the turning position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is driven. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 161) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive can be stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, before operating the one-shot button 520. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of the present example, after the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frame 5 is linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and thus the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to a defect in the driving of the game ball. It has to be able to bet.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hitting ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a flow path for a plurality of game balls inside which is open on the front side, and a front cover 544 for closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball entrance 542a which is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base which communicates with the first ball entrance. A first ball passage 542b that spreads to the right in front view as it goes toward the front end of 542, and a second ball entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the second ball passage 542d and extends downward and is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower right corner in a front view is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged in a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and is open upward, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b that is arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of this example uses the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. It is possible to supply to the upper plate 301 from 544a via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

  In addition, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. Of the swing member 548 pivotally supported by the full swing sensor, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full member detection sensor 550 does not detect the swing member. And 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swing member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542 and an upper end rotatable leftward in a front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , Is provided, and static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of the game balls can be removed.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also filled, the game balls will flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770 From the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stay in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) stops the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. A notification is given to a person who prompts the player to eject the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  In addition, when the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It is not detected, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. Further, FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 57 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 57 (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 57 (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the action of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball hitting launcher 650, a rear cover 582, and a front cover. A partition part 58 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removing member 583 having a and the game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover one by one, and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 that is rotatably supported around an axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 partitions the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the upper surface of the partition 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, and bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 582a to the hitting ball launching device 650, and at the same time, the game entered from the entrance 581a to the partition part 583a. The blocking section 584a blocks the movement of the ball toward the ball holding section 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) side and remains in the partition section 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved back and forth by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip swings vertically due to the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip swinging vertically of the ball feeding operation rod 586. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is rocked by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which moves forward and backward. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  In addition, the slewing member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example receives a moment such that the weight 583c rotates counterclockwise in a front view. The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by contacting the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. At normal times, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a to contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and enters the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b into the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 581a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is The partition part 583a can be prevented from bouncing back.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a laterally long overall outer diameter in a rear view, and is located on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip that is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the boundary, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c are V formed between the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 so as to move away from each other. It is provided with a V-shaped cut portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cut portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time, is formed so as to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the fraudulent gaming ball I is played by the ball striking device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempt to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement path of the illegal game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the improper momentum of the game ball I.

  As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (leftward when viewed from the front) at the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 by the force of the illegal game ball I. The cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 57D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is dampened due to the friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, so that the wire between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 does not enter the game area 1100. Will be discharged through.

  Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed in the game area 1100 with the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw. You can prevent it from being exposed. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588, so that the illegal act cannot be performed. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player installs the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven to send the game ball to the hit ball launching device 650, and the ball hitting device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, whereby the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is reached. The game is played in the game area 1100 which is visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball-stripping member 583), the ball-sending unit 580 is arranged. The ball feeding member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are also brought into a state as close as possible, and when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, they remain on the ball feeding member 584 side. The number of game balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball is driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by operation, and to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls early. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and to prevent a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game is relatively performed. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 can be simply attached by comparing the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. Since the 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, the labor for assembling can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 have a problem. However, even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be easily solved.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper bowl ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism is quickly consumed and malfunctions or is damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, or the like. And durability can be improved.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game balls can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game balls from, and it is possible for the player to easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  Further, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. Since the partition part 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the partition part 583a as much as possible, and the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding mechanism are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

  Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 makes the entrance 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a communicate with each other when the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts on the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing member 583) durability can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, it is possible to prevent the game ball from hitting the partition 583a even if it collides with the partition 583a, and the game ball is repelled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in planar projection can be reduced. It is possible to exert the effect of.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, when the partition portion 583a or the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 fails, the partition portion 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and outlet are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the sending mechanism (inserting device) side even though the discharging operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it is possible to let the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and to move to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-removing member 583 is rotated via the bent rotation rod portion 583b, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact is linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the light with the rotary shaft 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball in the upper plate 301, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement in the direction, improve the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the attachment recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball launching device 650. As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire rod Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire rod Iw can be reliably cut off, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

  In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material sandwiched therebetween. Thus, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, so that the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. This glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a which are arranged on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement piece which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to engage with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration of the door frame 5, that is, the geometrical decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame by cutting it at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down below the vertically elongated oval game window 101. For driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The exterior of the door frame 5 is greatly different on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a natural rock rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, which are visible from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240, have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved planar shape.

  As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, when viewed from the front right, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be similar to each other (see FIG. 19), while the left front When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look like a different type of pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player and can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Also, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetric, for example, when the pachinko machines 1 are installed in multiple rows in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, etc., the overall appearance of the island facility feels solid and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is designed to be able to be light-emitted and decorated in any color so as to surround the. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 are turned on or off to change the mode of light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light emission decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by making each LED emit light as appropriate, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is included. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

  In addition, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. It has LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 210a and 210b to the player side by the substrate. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which are directed toward the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 and an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the extended frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to separately decorate and light. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be illuminated and decorated. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the outer appearance is continuous with the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery on the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmissive columnar pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration board 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101, correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 near the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101. A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the hatched area close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper central group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper central part. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. Further, the LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 are an upper center side group 107 that causes both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106 to be illuminated and decorated. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper center side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged below the game window 101, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate 301 is illuminated. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the center of the upper side of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be informed.

  The light-emitting decoration on the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 have 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and the peripheral lenses 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include left and right 109a and front and rear 109b as a set of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 sandwiched therebetween. No. 2 system, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems, which is triple the number. The LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) so that the game window 101 is spread outward. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided in the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged further outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, by appropriately emitting light to each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by making only the radial groups 104 emit light, a light emission effect of radially emitting light around the game window 101 is performed, and at the same time as the radial groups 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted. By doing so, it is possible to perform a light emission effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting / blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light. It is possible to give a luminous effect by adding an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by making each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 individually emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) are rotated.

  Further, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player has a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a low probability non-time saving state, a high probability non-time saving state, A low-probability time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state, etc.) can be produced.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making the light emitted in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guides the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is produced. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108 ,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of the present example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The award ball unit 700 for and a flow of game balls from the award ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600 and opened with respect to the body frame 3. Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electric parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, the back cover 900 that covers the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view in a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 becomes substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed on the main body frame base 600. Is able to improve.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 is a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in a front view, a front frame of the front end frame portion 602, which is recessed rearward from the front surface, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Of the door frame projecting piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion which spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board mounting portion 606 on which the game board 4 is mounted and the game board mounting portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantial center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605, the game board of the game board 4 being formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed further rearward than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction so as to penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604, and a plurality of main-frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in the front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and the lower rear wall portion 604 passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that expands in a fan shape around an axis centered on the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported on the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixing tool 690, the operation piece 690b abuts on the stopper 617, and by abutting on the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

  Further, in the main body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front (front side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction are provided below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view. Then, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Further, the main body frame base 600, when viewed from the rear, gently and obliquely descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from an intermediate position in the vertical direction to a position slightly higher in the vertical direction and through which game balls can flow. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is designed so that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game ball that has flowed through the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 will be described later in detail. It is now in circulation.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the rear side, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction to pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 at the front end left end upper and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

  First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extending portion 632, the shaft supporting pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft supporting pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front extension 632 when viewed from the front, and the door frame 5 pivots to the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the end. In this upper shaft support member 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the front extending portion 642b. And a stopper 642d that is provided upright from the left end of the front view of the front side 642a and restricts the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame support metal fittings 644 of the lower support metal fittings 640 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and have a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

  The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are located on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support member 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are positioned on the same axis, and the lower frame fitting 640 has a door frame shaft support hole 642c in which the door frame frame support hole 642c is inserted. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 in an openable and closable manner. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is slidable. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 is capable of driving the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, a hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be rotatable integrally, a mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a trajectory of movement of the mallet 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends diagonally to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652 with a predetermined position above as the base end, and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. Ball stopper that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time that 658 can be passed. The ball 656 (hammer tip 658) is restricted from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the launch rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stopping piece 662. And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the batting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b, which is oriented toward the normal direction and has a tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c, which extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and is in contact with the stopper 664, are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

  Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shaped recess, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation at a position apart from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that it is possible to absorb the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts, and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutting. Is able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc., when the ball hitting launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launching rail 660 is substantially centered in the left-right direction and is placed at the bottom. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, lower than the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the fal space 626 extending downward in the left-right direction by a predetermined width. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example shoots the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by launching the game ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660. You can do it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 which supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the hammer 656. ing.

  In the hitting ball launching device 650 (shooting solenoid 654) according to the present embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), 100 game balls are sequentially launched at regular intervals per minute. It is driven so as to achieve the launch speed (pace). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (maintained), the game balls are successively driven into the game area 1100 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

[1-3D. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Based on the above, it is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper portion of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And, a tank rail unit 730 which is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and which aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A payout device 740 for paying out based on an instruction, and a game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear side. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. It is formed integrally with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of the vertical edge of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the award ball, the prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game balls discharged from the prize ball device 740 downward, and the rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the award ball base 710 is provided with an attachment hole, an attachment boss, or the like for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, or the like, or the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape only in the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right rear part projecting rearward of the bottom wall part 721 of the right rear portion 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side (the shaft support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, one end of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725, and a weight is held therein. . The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. In addition, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730, and It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723 in a plan view. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with a predetermined depth that is open at the top and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted to be low. This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

  This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) when viewed from the front is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 that covers the top of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped by the ball leveling member 727 to the next level, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and the alignment gear 732 is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gearwheel 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately prized one by one. Device 740.

  It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is designed to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated, and the projecting piece 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 a to the inside of the tank rail 730. By inserting into, it is possible to close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 by the projecting piece 735a, it is possible to stop the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game balls and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the rear end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d communicating with the lower end (right side of the rear side) of the sorting space 741b in rear view and extending downward and opening to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back lid 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back lid 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated with each other. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes. A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout delivery unit that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotator 748 are integrally rotatably fixed to the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749, and.

  In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls that are attached to the unit base 741 and circulate in the prize ball passage 741c. Is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 that holds the rotation angle sensor 752 and the rotation angle sensor 752 that detects the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. I have it.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749. ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and that is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The metal fitting 757, the payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 is provided.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward, and is partially cut out at the outside of the cut portion of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a penetrating part in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball cut switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball cut switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a by the ball break switch 741e by pressing the operating piece by the game ball. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball cut switch 741e (ball cut state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall being out of ball. It will be notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

  The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole, and has an upper end bulged rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the center in the up-down direction, and a relay board mounting portion. The sensor substrate mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and the through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is prevented. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recesses 748a one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are detected by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110, or by operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotating shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is designed to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

  In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is arranged. The game balls dispensed to the ball removal passage 741d side are from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, a ball removal passage 778 of a full tank distribution unit 770, a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power board box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game balls are filled in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full-tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and the upper end of the rear end is opened upward at approximately the center in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And, the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79), and discharges the game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 to the front side to the front. A normal ball outlet 774 opening at the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79). A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal port 777 that opens upward to the left end in front view of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. Ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received in the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball that has flowed through the ball removal passage 778 is discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view and A ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged to face each other and communicate with each other, and the game ball discharged from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 to be in the dish unit 300. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear side, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 779 is the body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

  In the full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 through the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and exits above the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

  By the way, when the upper bowl 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with game balls and further game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be discharged from the 544a to the upper tray 301 side stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually passes through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to fill the upstream normal passage 773. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b under the dish unit 300. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

  The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust or dust that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are automatically Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate is filled up like a conventional pachinko machine and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate. It is possible to avoid the interruption of the driving of the game ball, to eliminate the annoyance during the game, and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example branches the passage of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, the rear portion of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 is full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. You can Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively large (wide), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game is played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the player.

  Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the inlet (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c are provided, the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls in the main body frame 3. Thus, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Further, the game balls sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if the game balls are exchanged for, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to a shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  Also, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to dedicate the player to the driving operation of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storing plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, it is possible to deepen the storage dish to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls, and the player can frequently play without worrying about the storage amount. And the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the substantial storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full with game balls and the game balls cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number of pachinko machines 1 can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have an area in which the game balls can be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is stored. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be adapted to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In doing so, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the defect early and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the body frame. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed to move the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to interrupt the flow of the game ball.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction; And an opening / closing spring 794 that biases the

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end in front view to support the opening / closing crank 793 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed near the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. From the right side to the right, and the tip extends to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and the drive rod 793b is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792 by protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open / close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, and the like of the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, whereby the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-and-down direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated clockwise in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening / closing shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 moves up to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Is able to.

  In this way, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembling it. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. 89 (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and FIG. 89 (B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 89 (A).

  The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power board box 830 from the rear side, and the power board box holder 840 A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end formed to be substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810. I have it.

  The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape extending in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that protrudes forward from the front surface, an opening 812 that is disposed above the center of the shield wall portion 811 at the center in the left-right direction and that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. A plurality of vertically elongated slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls that have flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Is able to.

  In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. With this, it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830.

  The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage to invert the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 to the front side. The speaker box is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831 therein, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  The launch power supply board box 830 is detachable from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 844 of a power board box holder 840, which will be described later, and which is opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Accordingly, in the state where the body frame 3 is assembled, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

  Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 into two spaces, a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC / DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the emission power supply board 831 can be replaced easily, which contributes to the reduction of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the launch power supply board box 830 can be replaced with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830.

  Moreover, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the work of exchanging the firing power supply board 831 can be performed. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be very easily eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, but it does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life of the emission power supply board 831 is extremely longer than that of the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are provided not on the power supply board 851 but on the firing power supply board 831 which is a separate body from the power supply board 851. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short service life.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached / detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristics. Even if an illegal attempt is made to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach and attach the launch power board 831, which makes it difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraud, and to prevent fraud in which the firing power supply board 831 is intentionally changed by optimizing the firing power supply board 831 to be changed, and making it difficult to perform fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who is irritated from developing into fraud such as fraud.

  Further, since the emission power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power supply board 831 is tampered with, the emission power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to prevent illicitness. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 which controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced by changing the model, the launch power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily adapted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from deteriorating. can do.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached / detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 to the island facility such as a game hall, The time and labor required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristic is changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control section 4120 (the payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for, and to reduce the burden on the side of the hall.

  Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, so that a problem occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced. It is possible to solve the problem by shortening the interruption period of the game as much as possible and to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detached. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing a fraudulent act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulently acted on, and the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent acts can be prevented.

  Further, the launching power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position for supporting the launching power supply board box 830 is rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily ensured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 which is opened upward on the left front side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box accommodating portion 843 that is open to the front and the upper side and can accommodate the rear side of the firing power board box 830; And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is positioned at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed by flowing through the main body frame base removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810. The game ball that has flowed into the game ball and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharging section 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving section 841 will be described below in detail through the discharge passage 842, and the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged to.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810. The recess can be formed.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  In addition, the power supply board box 850 is a standing wall protruding rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminals 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 on the power supply board 851 face the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 that is disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. A wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  In the power supply board box 850, as shown in FIG. 87, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 connected to the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

  By the way, when connecting the connector terminal where the wiring cord is extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord toward the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. There is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal because the terminal is pressed against the terminal side. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Also, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be easily turned off by the wire guide portion 850d immediately after the wire cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of work can be continuously performed. It can be performed, and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, and the connector 855 is projected by the standing wall portion 850b rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is easy to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

  Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 which the power supply terminal 853 faces, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended straight to the rear side as much as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . Further, since the power supply board 850 is covered with the power supply board 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which may cause a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Has become.

  Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power source and the occurrence of a power failure, or the power terminal 853 is disengaged from the power substrate 851, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a defect.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

  Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, it is difficult for the wiring cord 854 to be removed from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition to ensuring the above-described effects, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of operations continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

  The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862, and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separating / cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating / cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Therefore, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc., which are attached to the payout control board 4110, face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in a rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal board 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of a transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display installed on the island facility side, the CR unit 6 or the like is displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) which is formed on an inner upper portion of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes an upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on a lower inner portion of the board mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference thereof is sized so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall thereof is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends in the rearward direction from the bottom wall of the board cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outside of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusions 871e of the board base 871 are set in a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, the protrusions 871e are provided on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as much as possible. It is placed so that it is close to

  Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the board cover mounting portion 871b as viewed from the rear side in the vertical direction so as to be separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end as viewed from the rear side. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube that is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending forward from the 873a (on the side of the substrate base 871) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement member that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear and can be engaged with the engagement hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a pawl piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with its front side opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal board 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked in the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

  The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the left and right ends of the through hole 875b to the front side. And a locking piece 875d which is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be opened and closed. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are in a state of substantially contacting the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is the D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of the present example is, in the assembled state, in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. Of the projection 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier wall is constructed and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an illegal tool having excellent flexibility is made to enter between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit connected as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if the D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is like this.

  In addition, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state in which the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

  Further, in a state where the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board in the direction along the front surface (the back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d and the board of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 is present respectively, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is attempted to enter between (boundary) between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. Also, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tools from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. The pachinko machine 1 can surely prevent fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, it is possible to cover the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraud.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped collision wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected by the collision wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the board cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal board 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against misconduct. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if an attempt is made to insert a driver or the like between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, an illegal act will be performed. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the corresponding opening portion 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, outside the terminal board box 870. The needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the terminals of the connected wiring cords, and high crime prevention capability. Can be one.

  Further, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, which can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874 itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. , Because it is possible to detect fraudulent acts and it becomes easier to find fraudulent acts, so do not hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is turned to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 is turned to the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control section 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, the respective decorative boards, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal board 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover taken apart and seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball that is formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body portion 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the back cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating to the left side in the front-rear direction in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking hole 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking that is elastically locked from the rear side to the locking hole 922. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. It includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is adapted to be locked in the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and the fastening member 924 is extended along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923 a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

  In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side in the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 of the main body 902 of the back cover 900, so that the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and the fastening can be easily performed only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. The back cover 900 can be released, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified and the maintainability can be improved.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end on the right side of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape above the connection cutout 910 in the front view. The main body 902 is provided with a rectangular notch for confirmation 914 and a confirmation notch 914 at the lower left corner of the main body 902.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 are passed through the connection cutouts 910. Is facing the rear side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the checking opening 912, and is used for checking. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Thus, it is possible to confirm the operation, the appearance, and the management state of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904 in an elongated shape. It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front and are wide and extend long in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 are the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the device so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Has become. By the way, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Since the game board 4 is held by the main body frame 3, the rear cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance and the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is still guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, and therefore it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be directly positioned in the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be securely held in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by a gap between the guide member 923 and the slot 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess for accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover of the main body frame 3. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 can be brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screwed and coupled with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening can be performed only by pulling as compared with the engagement by the locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activity can be obtained.

  Further, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3 and to move the male screw portion 924 straightly with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. Therefore, the male screw part 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking hole 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking hole. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached is a shaft extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be moved to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is performed. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be minimized by using the fastening member 924 as only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance can be performed. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

  Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b through the insertion hole 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side plate piece 952a extending substantially in the vertical direction with a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the side plate piece 952a viewed from the front. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front side from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d that extends longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with the front constituent member 1110 in the game board 4. The left side of the game panel 1150 as viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  In the side crime prevention plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side member. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-like protrusion 166, and prevents a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 108). Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. The rear side piece of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 formed in the substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the above is inserted (entered), and the front end piece 952b is inserted in the U-shaped side. Since it is in a state of being sandwiched by the projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the pivotal support side of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by contact, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 from the body frame 3. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the crime prevention side plate 950 on the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5 (axial support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

  Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcement unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a burr. It is possible to favorably prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread even if they are gouged by another tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a on the crime prevention side plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the front-rear dimension of the side piece 952a becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the crime prevention side plate 950 as a whole can be further enhanced, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and performing fraudulent acts. .

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the crime prevention side plate 950 (main body 952) having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and, as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent, a defect such as a decrease in strength that occurs during processing is generated. The crime prevention side plate 950 can be made as small as possible and has high durability and strength.

[1-3I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. FIG. 3C is a rear perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding lever for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 68. The door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 on the right side (open side) in the front view of the main body frame base 600, the lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and the peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front, and are attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 is extremely thin in its lateral width dimension as compared with a conventional locking device in which a base body formed in an L-shaped cross section is integrated. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to fraudulently act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the open side (rear side) and the closed side (front side). A hook through opening 1002, an upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, a screw stopper portion 1003 protruding outward toward the middle, and a screw stopper portion. An upper end and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and the lower ends of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side protrude forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

  The screw fastening portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is the hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 621 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the lock device 1000.

  The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw stopper 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions in the upper, lower and middle of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are provided with the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole for the door. Since the structure is such that the lock device 1000 is inserted into the main body frame base 621 for positioning and locking, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the locking device 1000 on the front side and the rear side. It can be fixed to. Particularly, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking protrusion 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the rear side fixing structure is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling, as compared with the case where the locking device 1000 is formed on the close side surface 1001b.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking it with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet oblong holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower part thereof and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side, and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are attached at the upper and lower two positions so as to be mounted with the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in the bottom of the lock device 1000 and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward; Is equipped with.

  The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first tampering prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged inside the U-shaped base body 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is opened vertically in the plate-shaped surface at a position overlapping with the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above and diagonally so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97B (the clockwise direction in FIG. 97B).

  Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from the outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restriction protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate through the restriction protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. Further, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, whereby the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base body 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 rotatably by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted “te” shape, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the body frame base 600, the door frame 5 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 formed in the body frame base 600 (see FIGS. 63 and 68, etc.). It can be engaged with a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet elongated hole 1042 and for the door frame. The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is attached to the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically long so as not to interfere with the raising operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that penetrates the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, it is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the door frame sliding rod 1040 to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the tampering prevention cutout portion 1007 in the lower rear portion of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 interferes with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a metal plate upper hook member 1051, a metal plate lower hook member 1052, a connecting wire rod 1052 for connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, Is equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the conventional case, but is made of a metal including the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating left and right in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051. The mutual movement with the 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The elongated hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 descends the body frame sliding rod 1050 by the rotating operation. Is for engaging. In addition, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 is rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the sliding bar 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without any play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while sliding the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding member. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to the 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is hung over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent second fraud. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

  In this way, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 forming the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are engaged with each other, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (B). The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and to connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 has an upper side inclined downwardly toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts against the lower end portion, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 upward claw portions and the closing plates 24 and 25 are again locked with each other. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by abutting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 for the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In addition, the locking device 1000 of this example does not engage in an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first of the structures for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of doing. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tampering prevention member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention cutout 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is tampered with. It is in a state of being engaged with an engaging notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the entire main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, so that the hooked portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is reached. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For that reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

  Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are completely accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001. Since this prevents illicit tools from entering the enclosed space, the structure is such that illicit acts cannot be performed easily.

  As described above, the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device in which the L-shaped base body is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

  Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, middle and lower sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws, it is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 have a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A structure may be adopted in which lock mounting holes that are screwed through the piece 1008 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

  Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall 540. The structure may be such that 1050 is housed, and the same operational effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base for aligning the prize ball tank 720 storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side, and game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and a rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710. The rear side of the tank rail unit 730 or the prize ball device 740 has a transparent ball part 740 partially attached to the rear side and a side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600. Since it has a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane, after the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. Side and rear side surface can be visually recognized, and the back side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 covering the back side of the game board 4. It can be 1.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is detached from the front side of the 601 side, remove them. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear surface or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is found, it can be easily found, fraudulent acts can be prevented, and a fraudulent device attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside. The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

  Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described operational effects are reliably exhibited. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating rearward projections, it can be caught or abutted on other members in the installed island equipment. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and control can be prevented from becoming instable due to heat, which makes the game control unstable and deforms members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game balls cannot pass through. Therefore, for example, even if the game balls spill on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the game balls pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 107. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 taken in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like when viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board when the FIG. FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. Based on a control signal from the main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. And a function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visually recognized by the player. To have. Although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and the details will be described later, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 116, etc.).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 of this example is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a center view in a front view in a clockwise circumferential direction, and extends to an upper right diagonal position after passing through an upper end in the left-right direction in a front view. An inner rail 1112 that is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 that extends in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113, and the outer rail 1111. The end portion (upper end) is tied to the end portion (upper end) of the game ball that has been rolling along the outer rail 1111 and the hitting portion 1114 is capable of contacting the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1113. At the boundary of the game area 1100, the outer opening guide surface 1115 which is arranged at the lowermost end and becomes lower toward the rear, and the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is rotatably supported and closes the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is rotatable only between a closed position that extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and an open position that rotates clockwise in a front view and opens the space between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. A backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed. By jumping over the space, it is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is inserted. , By turning to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

  Further, when the game ball is strongly hit in the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by abutting the game ball on this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, it is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to enhance wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball, and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is alleviated. In addition to being able to play, the game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 that protrudes from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118, which extends to the front end and is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 of the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Therefore, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

  Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projection piece 182, a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end when viewed from the front, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are spaced apart at the right end when viewed in the vertical direction. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged as a set, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122 that is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 mounted inside the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the body frame 3. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage cutout 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, so that the game board 4 is held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branching unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. A fastening portion 1124 that is thinly formed, and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 that is arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 when viewed from the front and that sticks a certificate stamp for certificate confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in the fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This game panel 1150 has an outlet 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the outer-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side in the front view at the lower end. A ball passage cutout 1152 of the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component 1110 and a downward projection 1152 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner of the front view. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front constituent member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front constituent member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 101) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open upper side and a front side. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to vertically penetrate at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion has an out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged (discharged) from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and are supplied (discharged) to the bottom surface of the substrate holder 1160. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. It should be noted that the out-ball discharging portion 1161 is located immediately above the discharging-ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board unit 800 are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed such that the tips are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and are fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side at the rear end of the rear surface of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is disposed so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear side. The fixed portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 is a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end in rear view of the board base 1171 and fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the right end in rear view of the board cover 1172. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in rear view by sandwiching the elastic fixing pieces 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) that is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating / cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. As a result, whether the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened can be visually discriminated from the outside.

  Since four sealing parts 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and the hermetic seal is cut when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and a trace of opening and closing remains in this hermetic seal. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened / closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a program or the like of game contents). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the misconduct.

  Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110 and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the sealing portion 1176 and the hermetic seal described above are cleverly worked, the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention performance can be confirmed by checking the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 other than by visual inspection. Is able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display portion 1181 disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side and the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  The display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), displays a game state that changes depending on a game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. A game state indicator 1183 for one LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of game balls into the first starting opening 2101. For the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the first special symbol memory display 1184 is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the first special lottery result is selected by the receipt of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101. The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as, and the second starting opening 210 arranged diagonally above and right of the first special symbol display 1185. Second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls to the second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 The second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, which is composed of two LEDs lined up in the vertical direction, is provided.

  Further, in the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180, the number of reservations relating to the passage of the gate section 2301 by the game balls is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display device 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying, and a normal lottery result which is arranged by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 arranged below the normal symbol storage display is displayed as a normal symbol. Ordinary symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for, and the diagonal right upper side of the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" big winning opening A round display 1190 including two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening / closing pattern 2103.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and the color of the emitted light and the lighting and blinking. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, low probability non-time saving state, time saving state, high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.). ing.

  Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memorized number) of the first special symbol that has been held (stored). This first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b. -The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball was received in the second starting opening 2102. In this case, the start of variable display is held (stored) and the number of held (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. -The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, Both 1187b are lit up, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b are Both are designed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery that is selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED is stopped after changing for a predetermined time according to the changing pattern, and the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED causes the first special The player side can be made to recognize the lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red / green / orange color LED that is capable of changing its luminescent color, and is a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting / blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2301. The display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the start of variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is displayed. This normal symbol storage display 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols. In this example, up to four variable displays of the normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a 4-round display lamp 1190a and a 16-round display lamp 1190b, each of which is composed of a predetermined LED. By turning on each lamp, the round in the "big hit" game is played. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol storage The display device 1188, the normal pattern display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 161). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so the player or game It becomes possible to let the clerk in the hall recognize the position of the display portion 1181 without any confusion. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 configured by 7-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are respectively configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

  In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as the above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, so 7 Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming uncomfortable during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting attention to the movable effect and effect image.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is a plate-shaped plate that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, which is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150, and is larger than the outer shape of the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8-10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 that are arranged near the outer periphery and are formed in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. Is equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and the lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, as will be described in detail later, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. This clearance allows the expansion and contraction of the panel plate 1210 to be absorbed even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands or contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with engaging claws 1224 and engaging pieces 1225 which engage with the engaging step 1213 at positions corresponding to the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 to the front side. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. A predetermined amount of space is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement stepped portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 has a boss insertion hole for the front component member 1110. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 has a recessed shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state in which the rear surface side outer peripheral portion protrudes rearward, and the recessed amount ( Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 155, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is fixedly mounted on the mounting support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is fixed to the main body frame 3. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and capable of screwing predetermined screws in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c on the front surface of the back box 3010 (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small inner diameter hole are mixed to have a proper diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within the range. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball emitted from the ball hitting launcher 650. However, the guide is smooth. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape and supports them and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail implanting device. It is possible to set it in the state of being. In addition, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1120, and a lower end penetrating leftward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction and downward. Is opened to the front, and a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner in front view are inserted. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 104). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing the panel holder 1220 to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out-ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to fit with the positioning protrusion 607 provided, and by fitting the out-ball discharge groove 1235 with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224, the engaging piece 1225, and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel plate 1210, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail arranging device without modifying the arranging device, thereby increasing the cost for arranging the obstacle nail G. It can be suppressed.

  Although not shown in the figure, the game panel 1200 of this example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. In addition, the front unit 2000 can be attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Accordingly, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the game panel 1200 as a whole even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and it is a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 is visible to the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 compatible with various models can be provided by only exchanging the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, it is possible to make the panel holder 1220 a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing parts of various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of previous component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a different form from the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. Note that the gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220, which are different from those in the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example in FIGS. 103 to 105 except that the detailed description is omitted here.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different, and it is not provided with a function display unit 1180. The points are very different. Note that the other configurations are similar to those of the previous component member 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). Prepared for 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending inward in a clockwise direction in a front view from the out-port guide surface 1115 as a base point up to the stoppers 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arcuate shape is formed between the stopper portion 1114 and a right upper portion of the certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged immediately below the stopper portion 1114, and the lower end of the arcuate portion has an outlet opening. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a linear shape inclined so as to decrease toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

  The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-described front component member 1110, and the player can be more enjoyed by the wide game region 1100. You can do it.

  In the example of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A. You may make it attach the game panel 1150 which consists of one board as shown in 101.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcement unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded mold material, and its vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 of the game board 4 are combined. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side piece 952a that extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side piece 952a to a substantially right-angled inner side (open side). A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side surface piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of space on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and a substantially inward direction inward from the rear end of the side surface piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The height of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above, using a plurality of elongated metal plates. On the outer side of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft-supporting side, a shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section opening to the outside (shaft-supporting side) is provided. In the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is made stronger by the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached to and supported by the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is generated. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. A rear side piece of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 which is formed in a substantially U shape is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the side U-shaped protrusions 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the shaft-supporting side U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the above from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened and the main body frame. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the door 3.

  Since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the crime prevention side plate 950 extends rearward of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150), and an illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plates 12 of the outer frame 2 are in contact with each other so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the side surface side It has become possible to sufficiently counter the vandalism of. In addition, generally, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it becomes almost impossible for an illegal tool to enter the rear side of the side piece 952c from the rear end, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 that houses the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 are connected to the game board 4. It can be seen from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing it from the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent an unauthorized act. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device and enhance the deterrence against the illegal activity. ing.

  Further, from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, so that the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. Even when tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt remain between the main frame 3 and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to and removed from the outside It is possible to easily find out from the above, and it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed composition of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 115. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the diagonal left front. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and obliquely seen from the rear. It is a figure.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and when a player operates the handle device 500, a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines and forms the inner circumference of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 and in a position corresponding to the game region 1100. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 114 etc.) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood board.

  Further, the game board 4 is a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a rear unit 3000 from the player side to the rear side. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visibly attached and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160. And a main control board box 1170 attached to the.

  The table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is an attacker unit 2100 which is arranged in the lower part of the game area 1100 so as to extend in a front view right direction from directly above the outlet 1151 and a pachinko machine on the right end front surface of the attacker unit 2100. The function display unit 1180, which is mounted at a position visible to the player side from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when mounted on 1, and the function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game state and the like, and the inner periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. It has a front side unit 2200 arranged along with, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the rear wall 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b which penetrates the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the front-rear direction. A back box 3010, a back horizontal production unit 3100 arranged on the upper side and left and right sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back production unit 3300 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, An underside effect unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3010b in the inside of the back box 3010.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 161) having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150, which will be described later in detail. A box 1910 and an inverter board box 1920 housing an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight are provided.

  In the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 1100 is divided into left and right by the center role object 2500 attached to the game panel 1150, and the outer periphery on the right side of the center role object 2500 and the game. Between the inner circumference of the area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A), the width is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the inside of the game area 1100. Between the circumference (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A) is a large area in which the game balls can circulate sufficiently, and in the area on the left side and the lower side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, the game panel 1150. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the.

  In the game board 4 of the present example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a predetermined strength or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Of the guide passage member 2142, is guided by the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 and is discharged from directly above the gate portion 2105 to the downward direction, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability. There is. That is, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the gate portion 2105 by performing so-called right hitting.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in this example, as shown in FIG. 130, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 in a time saving state and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery result is obtained in an extremely short time. Since the ordinary lottery result is “hit”, the movable piece 2106 retracts to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting opening 2102, and the gate portion 2105 is entered. The game ball that has entered enters the second starting opening 2102 as it is. When the normal lottery is “miss”, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is discharged to the upper side of the special winning opening 2103. Therefore, by hitting the right side, it is possible to play a game in which the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are directly aimed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is driven to the left side of the center role object 2500 (so-called left-handed driving), the game ball is guided toward the front side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of implanted obstacle nails, It is possible to win game balls to the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2101, the general winning opening 2104, etc. of the attacker unit 2100. In addition, when the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504 by being guided to the warp entrance 2504 connected to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. The game ball supplied to 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, and it is possible to entertain a motion different from the motion by the obstacle nail, and the game ball enters the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2510. When released, it is possible to win the first start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with a high probability.

  As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, it is possible to play different impressions on the right side and the left side of the center accessory 2500, and it is possible to provide a variety of games to prevent getting tired. You can do it.

[2-1. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the table unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the table unit of the game board seen from the rear.

  The table unit 2000 on the game board 4 is arranged at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 so as to extend from directly above the outlet 1151 to the right, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1150. The attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100. In the front view, a function display unit 1180 attached to the front end on the right end, a front side unit 2200 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc shape substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and a substantially central portion of the game area 1100. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is arranged on the right side of the game area and is supported by the game panel 1150.

  The attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000 will be described later in detail, but the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting slot 2101 in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and the predetermined special lottery result is drawn when the game balls are received. Starting slot 2102, a game ball can be accepted according to a special lottery result, and a special winning opening 2103 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls by accepting the game balls, and a predetermined number of game balls by accepting the game balls It is provided with a general winning opening 2104 to be paid out, and a gate portion 2105 in which a predetermined ordinary lottery result is drawn by a chance when a game ball is passed.

  The first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of this example are always capable of accepting game balls. Further, the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are variable winning openings that can be changed into a state in which the game balls can be received and a state in which the game balls cannot be received. The second starting opening 2102 can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2105, and the special winning opening 2103 is the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. The game balls can be accepted according to the result of the special lottery, which is performed when the game balls are accepted.

  The first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 of the present example is arranged immediately below the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 and on the axis line passing through the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 (immediately above the out port 1151). Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the second starting opening 2102 is provided with a first passage 2122a (guide path) through which the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is guided to the movable region of the movable piece 2106. In the second unit 2120 configured as one unit (prize ball device), the second unit 2120 is arranged on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first starting port 2101. Furthermore, the special winning opening 2103 is arranged below the second starting opening 2102 and on the right side in front view of the first starting opening 2101 so that the left end is substantially directly below the second starting opening 2102. Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is arranged on the upper right side in front view with respect to the first starting opening 2101. Further, the gate portion 2105 is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2102 on the upper right side in front view with respect to the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100.

  The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, has three general winning openings 2201 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 when viewed from the front, and a game arranged on the upper left side of the general winning opening 2201 when viewed from the front. The center part 2500 in the area 1100 is provided with a shelf part 2202 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down on the left side in front view to the right.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially in the center of the game panel 1150, and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side or the like. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 which can be visually recognized from the player side. In this center accessory 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502a that abuts the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a peripheral wall portion 2503 that blocks the game balls flowing down in the game area 1100 from entering the frame. The warp entrance 2504 opening at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, the warp exit 2505 discharging the game ball entering the warp entrance 2504 into the frame, and the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2505 were rolled to the left and right. A stage 2510 for discharging and returning to the game area 1100 later is provided.

  The stage 2510 of this center accessory 2500 is arranged directly above the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball recirculated and released from the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 has a high probability. The attacker unit 2100 can be received in the first starting port 2101.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 130. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit as seen from the front side, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit of the attacker unit as seen from the rear side. Further, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit that is disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit of the attacker unit that is disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 130 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit by cutting.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed in the lower left-right center of the game panel 1150, and then on the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, a first starting opening 2101 arranged immediately above the out opening 1151 in the game panel 1150 and capable of always receiving a game ball, and a position on the right side and slightly lower side in front view with respect to the first starting opening 2101. The second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130) arranged in the first starting opening 2101, the large winning opening 2103 located below the second starting opening 2102 and on the right side of the first starting opening 2101 in front view. And a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly above the first starting opening 2101 between the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a gate section 2105 in which the result of the ordinary lottery is drawn when the game ball passes. The gate portion 2105 is arranged on the right side and slightly upper side of the general winning opening 2104 in a front view, and substantially directly above the second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130).

  As shown in the figure, the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state of being able to receive the game ball at all times. Further, the second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130) is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and a plate that can be moved forward and backward with respect to the opened opening. The movable piece 2106 is provided. The second starting port 2102 is configured so that the game ball cannot be received when the movable piece 2106 is in the forward state, and the game ball can be received when the movable piece 2106 is in the retracted state. It is said to be a variable winning hole.

  In addition, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a horizontally long rectangular shape which is 4 to 6 times as long as the diameter of the game ball in the front view and is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball in the vertical direction. And a plate-like opening / closing member 2107 that can open and close the opened opening. The opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. When the opening / closing member 2107 is in a substantially vertical state, it is impossible to receive a game ball, and the opening / closing member 2107 is substantially horizontal. In this state, the game balls can be accepted, which is a so-called variable winning port.

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, similarly to the first starting opening 2101, so that the game ball can always be received. ing. Further, the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball can flow in the vertical direction.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment will be described in further detail. The attacker unit 2100 includes a first unit 2110 having a first starting opening 2101 and a special winning opening 2103, a second starting opening 2102 and a gate section 2105. Two units 2120, a third unit 2130 having a general winning opening 2104, a fourth unit 2140 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached, a first unit 2110, a second unit 2120, a third unit 2130, and a fourth unit. The unit base 2150 that supports the 2140 from the rear side, and the connection between the attacker solenoid 2113, the starting port solenoid 2124, the count sensor 2114, the second starting port sensor 2125, and the panel relay board 3025 that are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2150 are connected. Ata to relay And mosquitoes unit relay board 2160, and a.

  The first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 has a first starting port 2101 and an opening 2111a facing the special winning opening 2103, and is a plate-shaped first base 2111 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a first base 2111. The first box-shaped member having a special winning opening 2103 attached to the rear side of the first base 2111 so that the special winning opening 2103 is exposed from the opening and rotatably supporting an opening / closing member 2107 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103. A case 2112, an attacker solenoid 2113 supported in the first case 2112 for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2107, and a count sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball supported in the first case 2112 and received in the special winning opening 2103. And a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the first case 2112 and arranged on the rear side thereof. Is provided with a winning hole decorative substrate 2115, the.

  Further, the first unit 2110 is disposed on the front surface of the first base 2111 below the first starting port 2101, and on the front surface of the first base 2111 by being arranged in front of the middle object detection sensor 2116. The middle guiding decorative member 2117 attached and having a predetermined decoration, and the rear side of the first base 2111 are mounted at positions corresponding to the middle object detection sensor 2116 and the middle guiding decorative member 2117, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. An attacker middle decoration board 2118 is provided. The first unit 2110 is attached to the unit base 2150 via the first base 2111.

  The first base 2111 of the first unit 2110 is integrally formed with a first starting opening 2101 that projects forward from the front of the game panel 1150 (within the game area 1100) and is open at the top and the rear, and its rear end is When attached to the game panel 1150, the game panel 1150 extends to a position substantially matching the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Thereby, the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 can be guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The first case 2112 of the first unit 2110 has a box shape with its front side opened, and is divided into an upper case 2112a and a lower case 2122b into upper and lower parts. In addition, the first case 2112 is internally provided with a discharge port member 2112c for discharging the game ball, which has been received by the special winning opening 2103 and detected by the count sensor 2114, from a predetermined position downward. The first case 2112 is made of a light-transmissive material, and guides light from the special winning opening decoration substrate 2115 arranged on the rear side to the opening / closing member 2107 side to open or close the special winning opening 2103. The member 2107 can be decorated with light emission.

  Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 of the first unit 2110 is supported by the first case 2112 so that the plunger moves forward and backward. The attacker solenoid 2113 can rotate the opening / closing member 2107 by a link member 2113a connected to the tip of a plunger that moves forward and backward when energized. Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2113 is provided with a spring for urging the plunger in a forward (protruding) direction, and the opening / closing member 2107 closes the special winning opening 2103 while the plunger is forward. It is supposed to be in position. That is, in this example, when the attacker solenoid 2113 is energized, the plunger retracts (is retracted), the opening / closing member 2107 rotates from the closed position to the open position, and the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2103. It has become.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the middle object detection sensor 2116 of the first unit 2110 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section, and is capable of detecting an object positioned within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the middle object detection sensor 2116 are lined up in the left-right direction, and the front surface of the middle object detection sensor 2116 moves vertically as compared to the object moving in the left-right direction. It is easier for a moving object to detect.

  The middle guiding decorative member 2117 of the first unit 2110 has a decoration in which a downward arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward on the rear side of the front decoration. It is provided with a cylindrical frame-shaped light-shielding member 2117a that emerges. Thereby, the inside decoration and the outside of the arrow can be decorated in different manners by the attacker middle decoration board 2118 arranged on the rear side of the middle induction decoration member 2117.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 is a plate-shaped second base 2121 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is forward of the front surface of the game panel 1150 attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 (within the game area 1100). A passage forming member 2122 that projects into the second starting port 2102 and the gate portion 2105 and a movable piece 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the second base 2121 and that opens and closes the second starting port 2102 are slidably supported in the front-rear direction. A second case 2123 and a starting port solenoid 2124 supported in the second case 2123 for opening and closing the movable piece 2106 are provided.

  Further, the second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100, as shown in FIG. 124 and FIG. 130 together, holds the game ball supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 and received in the second starting opening 2102. A second starting opening sensor 2125 for detecting, a gate sensor 2126 supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2105, and arranged behind the second base 2121. A light-shielding member having a second starting opening decoration substrate 2127 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a plurality of openings arranged between the second starting opening decoration substrate 2127 and the second base 2121 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 2128 and.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 constitutes a part of a function display board 1191 having a normal pattern display 1189 composed of two LEDs mounted on the front surface at a predetermined position on the front surface of the second base 2121. Usually, a symbol display board 1191a is attached.

  The second base 2121 of the second unit 2120, as shown in FIG. 124, has substantially the entire front surface formed into a flat surface along the surface of the game panel 1150, and cooperates with the passage forming member 2122. Then, a passage through which game balls can flow can be formed on the front side. In addition, the second base 2121 is provided with a passage hole 2121a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which a game ball can pass in the lower left corner when viewed from the front, and a recessed portion 2121b which is curved backward toward the upper right corner when viewed from the front. . Further, the second base 2121 is an opening through which the plate-shaped movable piece 2106 can pass, a sensor support portion 2121c for supporting the second starting opening sensor 2125 and the gate sensor 2126, and a substrate for supporting the normal symbol display board 1191a. The support portion 2121d, a wall portion 2121e that extends forward from the right end of the substrate support portion 2121d in front view and covers the right side of the normal symbol display device 1189, and the like are provided. The second base 2121 is made of a light-transmitting material. Further, the second base 2121 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the passage forming member 2122 of the second unit 2120 has a shape in a front view that has a portion that extends vertically and a portion that extends leftward from its lower end. It is formed in an L shape. This passage forming member 2122 is provided with a first passage 2122a which allows the game sphere to flow in the vertical direction and has an upper end and a lower end opened at a position of a portion extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the passage forming member 2122 allows the game sphere to flow in the left and right direction at the position of the portion that extends in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, and opens upward at a position where the right end side substantially opposes the lower end opening of the first passage 2122a. The second passage 2122b is closed on the left end side. The first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Further, the passage forming member 2122 includes a plate-shaped wall portion 2122c that connects the lower end of the right side wall of the first passage 2122a in front view and the right end of the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b, and the first end on the upper end side of the wall portion 2122c. A right outlet 2122d that is open to the right side surface of the passage 2122a when viewed from the front and allows game balls to pass through, and a right shelf 2122e that extends from the lower end of the right outlet 2122d toward the right side when viewed from the front, and is short. The wall portion 2122c is a left discharging portion 2122f, which is formed on the opposite side of the first passage 2122a from the lower left side of the first passage 2122a when viewed from the front and the upper end of the second passage 2122b, and through which a game ball can pass. Inside the first passage 2122a, a left shelf 2122g that is continuous with the lower end of 2122f and that is formed on the upper side of the second passage 2122b and is inclined downward toward the left when viewed from the front. And a, a guide wall 2122h projecting rearwardly from the front wall at a height position definitive right outlet 2122d are formed.

  In the passage forming member 2122, the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a serves as the gate portion 2105, and the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b serves as the second starting opening 2102. Further, the passage forming member 2122 can support the gate sensor 2126 at a position above the right discharge port 2122d in the substantially vertical center of the first passage 2122a, and the passage forming member 2122 can flow through the first passage 2122a. The playing game ball can be detected by the gate sensor 2126.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 130, the passage forming member 2122 is configured such that the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b extends forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 when assembled as the second unit 2120. It is formed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 2106 provided, and the right end side opening is the second starting port 2102. As a result, unless the movable piece 2106 moves backward, the movable piece 2106 prevents the game ball from being received in the second starting opening 2102. The game ball thus blocked is discharged from the second unit 2120 to the special winning opening 2103 through the left outlet 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b and the left shelf 2122g. You will be heading.

  On the other hand, when the movable sphere 2106 moves backward and the game ball is received in the second starting port 2102, the game ball flows down the second passage 2122b and is detected by the second starting port sensor 2125. It Then, after this, the game ball is discharged to the rear side of the second unit 2120 (rear side of the game panel 1150) from the left end of the second passage 2122b through the passage hole 2121a of the rear second base 2121. (Discharged).

  Further, the passage forming member 2122 can cover the front side of the normal symbol display board 1191a attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 at a site below the right shelf 2122e.

  In the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122, the bottom wall located directly below the right end side opening in front view is formed in an arc shape, and the game ball that has passed through the right end side opening (second starting opening 2102) is smoothed. It can be distributed to the left. The guide wall 2122h formed in the first passage 2122a of the passage forming member 2122 is arranged at a position corresponding to the recess 2121b of the second base 2121 and is inclined in an arc shape so as to be lowered rearward. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the upper end opening (gate portion 2105) of the first passage 2122a can be smoothly guided into the recess 2121b of the second base 2121.

  The second case 2123 of the second unit 2120 has a box shape with an open front side and can be vertically divided into an upper case 2123a and a lower case 2123b. The movable piece 2106 can be supported so as to be slidable in the front-back direction. In addition to the movable piece 2106 and the starting opening solenoid 2124, the second case 2123 also has a link member 2129 for transmitting the movement of the plunger moving forward and backward of the starting opening solenoid 2124 to move the moving piece 2106 forward and backward. , Internally supported.

  The starting opening solenoid 2124 of the second unit 2120 is supported by the second case 2123 so that the plunger moves forward and backward, and in a normal state (when not energized), the plunger protrudes downward. In this normal state, the movable piece 2106 projects forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2124, and the movable piece 2106 enters the second starting opening 2102. The acceptance of the game ball is blocked. On the other hand, when the starting opening solenoid 2124 is energized, the tip of the plunger rises so as to be retracted, and the movable piece 2106 moves rearward from the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger. As it moves backward, the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102.

  The second unit 2120 is provided with a plurality of rectangular openings 2128a that are arranged in the light-shielding member 2128 in the left-right direction, and the openings 2128a of the light-shielding member 2128 are provided on the front surface of the second starting opening decoration substrate 2127. LEDs are mounted so as to correspond to each of the openings 2128a so that they can be illuminated and decorated.

  This second unit 2120, when the game ball enters into the first passage 2122a from the upper end opening (gate portion 2105), passes through the gate sensor 2126, and then is recessed in the second base 2121 by the guiding wall 2122h inclined rearward. After being once fed into the 2121b, it returns from the inside of the recess 2121b into the inside of the first passage 2122a and flows down onto the second starting port 2102. In this first passage 2122a, the guide wall 2122h and the recessed portion 2121b meander the game ball, which damps the downflow speed of the game ball and the movable piece 2106 or the second passage arranged on the downstream side. The impact applied to the 2122a can be reduced.

  As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 130, the passage of the gate portion 2105 is detected by the gate sensor 2126. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, An ordinary lottery is conducted and a predetermined ordinary lottery result is drawn. If the result of the ordinary lottery is a win, the movable piece 2106 is retracted from the front surface of the second base 2121 by the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2124, the second starting opening 2102 is opened, and the game ball can be received. The game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a will enter the second passage 2122b through the second starting port 2102. Then, the game ball that has entered the second passage 2122b flows leftward when viewed from the front by the arc-shaped bottom wall, and is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2125, and then rearward from the left end portion of the second passage 2122b. It passes through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the side, and is discharged (discharged) to the rear side of the second unit 2120 (the rear side of the game panel 1150). In this example, the time from when the gate sensor 2126 detects the passage of the game ball to when the movable piece 2106 is slid by driving the start opening solenoid 2124 to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2102. If it is a short time (for example, 0.1 second to 1 second), and the ordinary lottery result in the time saving state is a win due to the operation of the movable piece 2106, it becomes a trigger for the lottery. The game ball is received in the second starting port 2102. In addition, the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2124 in the time saving state is designed to be driven for a predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds) per hit, and after the predetermined time elapses, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is driven. The driving of the solenoid 2124 is completed, the movable piece 2106 slides forward, and the second starting port 2102 is closed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the ordinary lottery drawn is lost, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is not driven and the movable piece 2106 remains forward and the game ball flowing down from the first passage 2122a is moved to the movable piece 2106. As a result, entry into the second starting port 2102 is blocked. Then, the game ball whose reception to the second starting port 2102 is blocked by the movable piece 2106 flows from the left discharge port 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the left shelf portion 2122g, and is left. It is adapted to be discharged from the left end of the shelf 2122g (into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game panel 1150). In addition, the movable piece 2106 is inclined so that the upper surface is lower on the front left side, and even if the game ball tries to stay on the movable piece 2106, the inclination naturally rolls to the left in the front view, and the left side. It is designed to be discharged from the discharge port 2122f to the left shelf 2122g.

  In the second unit 2120, depending on the state of the game sphere flowing through the first passage 2122a, the game sphere may be emitted from the right outlet 2122d in the first passage 2122a and is emitted from the right outlet 2122d. The game ball is designed to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the right end of the right shelf 2122e through the right shelf 2122e.

  The third unit 2130 of the attacker unit 2100 is capable of contacting the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a general winning opening 2104 and a through hole 2131a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the general winning opening 2104 in a front view. The third base 2131, a lens member 2132 that is inserted into the through hole of the third base 2131 from the rear side, is attached to the third base 2131, and has a light-transmitting property, and is disposed on the rear side of the lens member 2132. And a gate decoration substrate 2133 having LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The third base 2131 of the third unit 2130 is integrally formed with a general winning opening 2104 projecting from the front surface of the game panel 1150 to the front (inside the game area 1100) and opening the upper and rear sides, and the rear end of the game. The state where it is attached to the panel 1150 extends to a position substantially matching the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the third base 2131 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

  The gate decoration substrate 2133 of the third unit 2130 is configured such that the LED mounted on the front surface emits light in an appropriate color so that the lens member 2132 can cause the inside of the through hole of the third base 2131 to emit light. . The gate decoration board 2133 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and the plate-shaped fourth base 2141 on which the function display board 1191 is attached to the lower rear surface, and the game panel attached to the upper front surface of the fourth base 2141. A guide passage member 2142 having a guide passage 2142a that projects forward from the front surface of the 1150 (within the game area 1100) and guides the game ball in the left-right direction, and is disposed below the guide passage 2142a in the guide passage member 2142. A right object detection sensor 2143 attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141 and a right guide decoration member 2144 attached to the guide passage member 2142 so that the front surface is exposed to the front on the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and having a predetermined decoration. And are equipped with.

  The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 has a U-shaped triangular shape when viewed from the front, and the hypotenuse at the left end is an arc shape that substantially follows the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100. Further, the fourth base 2141 has a plurality of through holes 2141a formed in the lower part thereof, through which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the function display substrate 1191 respectively face. The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

  The guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 extends along the upper side extending in the left-right direction of the fourth base 2141 and has a right end in a front view that opens upward and a left end that opens downward so that a game ball can flow. Is equipped with. The guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 has a front side closed and a rear side opened, and the opened rear side is closed by the front surface of the fourth base 2141. Further, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is inclined so that the left side in front view becomes lower.

  Further, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is arranged so that the right end in front view is close to the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in the assembled state, and flows down along the right inner circumference of the game area 1100. The game ball has come to enter the inside from the opening on the right end side. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is bent downward on the left end side in a front view, and the left end opening opened downward in the assembled state as the attacker unit 2100 is the gate portion 2106. It is formed so as to be located immediately above (the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120). In the guide passage 2142a and on the front surface of the fourth base 2141 corresponding to the guide passage 2142a, vertically extending protrusions are alternately arranged in the left-right direction, and the game balls are moved forward and backward in the guide passage 2142a. It can be meandered to reduce the flow rate. The left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a and the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a are separated by a distance slightly longer than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The right object detection sensor 2143 of the fourth unit 2140 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section, and can detect an object located within a predetermined front range. In this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the right object detection sensor 2143 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and the right object detection sensor 2143 moves in the left-right direction on the front surface of the object moving in the left-right direction. It is easier for a moving object to detect. Further, the fourth unit 2140 includes a sensor cover 2145 that covers the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and is attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141.

  The right guiding decoration member 2144 of the fourth unit 2140 has a decoration in which a rightward arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface. On the rear side of the right guide decoration member 2144, a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2146 is provided, in which a wall along the decorative shape of the right guide decoration member 2144 extends rearward. As a result, by the back lower right decoration substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the right guiding decoration member 2144, the inside and outside of the arrow can be light-emitted and decorated in different modes.

  The unit base 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is open. Further, the unit base 2150 is provided with a discharge port 2150a for receiving the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 2121b of the second base 2121 in the second unit 2120 and discharging the game ball rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2150.

  In the state where the attacker unit 2100 of the present example is arranged in the game area 1100, the first starting opening 2101 is located directly above the out opening 1151 with the middle guiding decorative member 2117 sandwiched in the substantially center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. The special winning opening 2103 is located approximately in the center in the left-right direction between the first starting opening 2101 and the right inner circumference of the game area 1100.

  In the attacker unit 2100, the first starting port 2101 is located directly above the out port 1151 and directly below the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2500 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. As a result, the game ball released from the chance exit 2514 can be accepted at the first starting opening 2101 with high probability. The game ball received in the first starting port 2101 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then sent to the middle guiding passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 described later. There is.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 supports the function display unit 1180 so as to be positioned on the right side of the special winning opening 2103 in a front view, and the right end portion (the right end portion of the function display unit 1180) is within the right side of the game area 1100. It is located slightly inside (on the left side) from the circumference. As a result, the game ball flowing down from above along the inner circumference of the right side of the game area 1100 falls onto the guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100, and the guide passage 2142a opened upward on the right end side. It is designed to enter inside. The game ball that has entered the guide passage 2142a is guided leftward in the front view by the guide passage 2142a and is discharged downward just above the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120, that is, the gate portion 2105. ing. Then, the game ball released downward from the left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a enters the gate portion 2105 with an extremely high probability.

  The game ball that has entered the gate unit 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided backward by the guide wall 2122h of the passage forming member 2122 after the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2126 arranged in the first passage 2122a, and the second It enters into the recess 2121b of the base 2121. Then, the game ball that has entered the recess 2121b is guided forward at the lower end of the recess 2121b and comes into contact with the rear surface of the front wall of the passage forming member 2122 and flows downward. In other words, in the first passage 2122a of the attacker unit 2100, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 meanders in the front-rear direction to flow down to the movable region of the movable piece 2106 without fail.

  In this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, the ordinary lottery is immediately performed, and the ordinary lottery result obtained by the lottery is instantly displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1189. If the result of the lottery is a normal lottery, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is driven and the movable piece 2106 is retracted so that the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is accepted into the second starting opening 2102 with an extremely high probability when the hit is drawn as a result of the ordinary drawing.

  Then, the game ball received in the second starting opening 2102 enters the second passage 2122b from the second starting opening 2102, is sent to the left in the front view, and is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2125. , The path is changed to the rear from the left end of the second passage 2122b, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 and the discharge port 2150a of the unit base 2150. .

  If the result of the normal lottery is lost, the game ball discharged downward from the first passage 2122a contacts the movable piece 2106 that closes the second starting opening 2102, and the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b. Is discharged from the left outlet 2122f to the upper left shelf 2122g of the second passage 2122b, and after rolling the left shelf 2122g to the left in the front view, from the left end of the left shelf 2122g within the game area 1100. It is designed to be released to the area above the special winning opening 2103 in.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 receives the game balls in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and according to the special lottery result that is drawn by lottery (for example, “4R certainty variation big hit A”, “4R certainty variation big hit B”). , “4R Probably Large Jackpot C”, “4R Probably Large Jackpot A”, “16R Probable Jackpot A”, “16R Probable Jackpot B”, “16R Probable Jackpot C”, “4R Probable Jackpot D”, “4R Probable Jackpot E” , "4R normal big hit b", "4R normal big hit c", etc.), the attacker solenoid 2113 in the first unit 2110 is driven in a predetermined pattern, and the opening / closing member 2107 is erected by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2113. By rotating from the closed position to the substantially horizontal open position, the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2103. The game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged below the attacker unit 2100 after being detected by the count sensor 2114 on the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 arranged between the first starting opening 2101 and the gate portion 2105 to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and then the back unit described later. It is adapted to feed the inside of the right guiding passage from the upper opening 3061 of the back right guiding member 3060 in the 3000.

[2-3. Front side unit]
Next, the table side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 131. 131A is a perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 131B is a perspective view of the front side unit as seen from the rear. The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction within the game area 1100 of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150 and at a position lower than the center in the up-down direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface of the inner rail 1112 when viewed from the front).

  As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 of the present example is formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in a front view, and is arranged substantially along the arc from the right end in the front view to the left. It mainly includes three general winning openings 2201 and a shelf 2202 that is arranged on the upper left of the three general winning openings 2201 and is inclined so that the right end side is lower. The three general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the front end side extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 and the rear end side extends rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and the upper and rear sides are opened, The game ball is formed in the game area 1100 so that the game ball can be always accepted.

  The shelf portion 2202 of the front side unit 2200 is arranged at a position such that the left end thereof is substantially in contact with the left inner circumference of the game area 1100, and has flown down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the front view in the game area 1100. The game ball can be guided to the right.

  The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-shaped unit base 2210 having three general winning openings 2201. The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210 and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, a guide member 2211 having a shelf 2202 formed at the upper end, and a left object detection sensor 2212 arranged below the right end of the shelf 2202 on the right side of the guide member 2211 when viewed from the front and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2210. , A left guide decorative member 2213 attached to the guide member 2211 so that the front surface is exposed to the front on the left side of the left object detection sensor 2212, and a rear side of the unit base 2210 attached to the front side thereof. A shallow box-shaped transparent unit cover 2214 is provided.

  The unit base 2210 of the front side unit 2200 has a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped portion that extends rearward from the plate-shaped portion and is inserted into the corresponding opening 1158 in the game panel 1150. It is equipped with a part and is adapted to be attached to the game panel 1150 at a plate-shaped part. The unit base 2210 is provided with a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface and is formed so as to partially have a light-transmitting property.

  The guide member 2211 of the front side unit 2200 has a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is a shelf 2202 that is linearly inclined so that the right side is lower on the upper side. The guide member 2211 has a circular through hole into which the left guide decoration member 2213 is inserted, approximately at the center.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the left object detection sensor 2212 of the front side unit 2200 is provided with a light projecting section and a light receiving section, and is capable of detecting an object located within a predetermined front range. ing. In this example, the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the left object detection sensor 2212 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and the front surface of the left object detection sensor 2212 moves in the left and right direction rather than the object that moves in the vertical direction. It is easier for a moving object to detect.

  The left guide decoration member 2213 of the front side unit 2200 has a decoration in which a leftward arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends rearward on the rear side of the front decoration. It is provided with a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2213a that projects. The light-shielding member 2213a has a rear end extending to a position slightly forward of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 in a mounted state. Thus, the LED on the lower back left decorative substrate 3020 of the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side of the left guiding decorative member 2213 can perform light emission decoration on the inside and outside of the arrow in different modes.

  The outer shape of the unit cover 2214 of the front side unit 2200 is substantially the same as the frame-shaped portion of the unit base 2210, and the rear end of the unit cover 2214 is formed in a depth that is slightly forward of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 when attached. ing. The unit cover 2214 has a through hole through which the light blocking member 2213a of the left guide decoration member 2213 can be inserted, and the rear end of the light blocking member 2213a faces rearward.

  The front side unit 2200 of the present embodiment can guide the game ball, which has flowed down the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100, to the right by the shelf 2202, and is further downstream than the shelf 2202. The game balls can be received by the three general winning openings 2201 arranged at. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150, and passes through the left opening 3072 of the back left guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 described later to the left guiding passage. It is supposed to be delivered.

[2-4. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 144. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from diagonally upper right front, FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from diagonally lower left front, and FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from rear. is there. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory member disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory member disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. In addition, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the front right middle rendering unit of the center character as viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the center right front rendering unit of the center character as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle rendering unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the front right middle rendering unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

  The center accessory 2500 of this example is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 after being inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150. As shown in FIG. 110, etc., it has a large window portion 2501 through which the liquid crystal display device 1900, which is arranged in the front and rear direction and has a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100, is visible, is visible. ing.

  The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped unit base 2502 having a flange portion 2502a capable of abutting with the front surface of the game panel 1150 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501, and bulges forward from the unit base 2502 to form a substantially central portion in the left-right direction. A peripheral wall portion 2503 that guides the game ball flowing down in the game area 1100 as a boundary to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame (inside the window portion 2501) is provided. A part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed by the unit base 2502.

  In addition, the center accessory 2500 has entered the warp entrance 2504, which is a warp entrance 2504 (see FIG. 112) into which a game ball that opens on the left outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and flows down the game area 1100 can enter. The warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball into the frame, and the game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 is rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the game area 1100 above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2510 which is disposed at the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 for recirculation.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent plate-shaped partition wall member 2520 which is disposed on the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and closes the window portion 2501, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the left side and the lower side of the window portion 2501 in a front view. A lower-center decoration board 2521 arranged and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, an upper-center decoration board 2522 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface on the rear side of the peripheral wall section 2503 above the window section 2501; An upper flange member 2523 attached to the upper left portion of the front surface of the base 2502 in front view and forming a part of the flange portion 2502a, and a left rear decorative member 2524 attached to the left side of the unit base 2502 in front view to decorate the inside of the frame. , Are provided.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the right side of the stage 2510 when viewed from the front, and the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 to change the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The start condition of the display is satisfied, but the start condition of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not satisfied yet (the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol)) Change display end, big hit game state end) Number of holding special symbols which is the number of satisfied start conditions (first special symbol holding number, second special symbol holding number), and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 normal symbol The start condition of the variable display is satisfied, but the start condition of the variable display of the normal symbol is not yet satisfied (the last display of the variable display of the normal symbol, the end of the big hit game state) The number of holds of the start condition (normal Number of symbols held) A displayable number of retained displays 2530, a center decoration member 2540 on which the number of retained displays 2530 is arranged and which is attached to the front side of the unit base 2502 to decorate the front surface of the unit base 2502, and a peripheral wall portion above the window portion 2501. A front production unit 2550 which is arranged in 2503 and which has a predetermined logo decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and which can be light-emittered by the center decoration board 2522, and a game which is arranged on the right side of the window 2501 when viewed from the front. It is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the table right middle decorative unit 2610 in the table right middle decorative unit 2600 having the table right movable decorative body 2610 that is movable according to the state (special lottery result). And a front right outside production unit 2700 having a predetermined decoration.

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 and is rollable in the left and right directions, and the first stage 2511 capable of discharging the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position. , Which is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2511, is supplied with game balls from the first stage 2511 and can be rolled in the left-right direction, and can discharge the supplied game balls from a predetermined position into the front game area 1100. The second stage 2512, the chance entrance 2513 in which the game ball can enter from a predetermined position on the second stage 2512, and the game ball entering the chance entrance 2513 from the position below the second stage 2512 in the game area 1100. And a chance exit 2514 that can be discharged inside.

  The first stage 2511 of the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction is high, and the whole is flat and smooth. It is formed in a wavy shape. The first stage 2511 is formed at a heightened portion in the center of the left-right direction, is lowered toward the front, and has a wide width in the left-right direction, and is the lowest on the left and right sides of the center discharge portion 2511a. And a side discharge portion 2511b which is formed in the portion and which becomes lower in the front direction and has a width in the left-right direction wider than that of the central discharge portion 2511a.

  The first stage 2511 has a front end other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b protruding upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b. . The right end of the first stage 2511 in the front view extends rightward so as to bite into the number of retained displays 2530 side.

  The second stage 2512 of the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so as to extend in the left-right direction so as to straddle the two side emission parts 2511b in the first stage 2511 and to lower the center in the left-right direction. The center of the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction is slightly higher. The second stage 2512 is formed at the central position in the left-right direction and is formed at the lowest position on both the left and right sides of the central guide portion 2512a, which becomes lower toward the rear and widens in the left-right direction. And a side discharge portion 2512b that becomes lower toward the front and has a width in the left-right direction wider than that of the central guide portion 2512a. In addition, in the second stage 2512, the front end other than the side discharge portion 2512b projects upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be discharged forward from other than the side discharge portion 2512b.

  The chance entrance 2513 in the stage 2510 is opened forward in a vertically extending wall-shaped portion formed between the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512, and a central guide portion 2512 a in the second stage 2512 is provided. It is located on the rear side. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 is guided rearward by the central guide portion 2512a, it enters the chance entrance 2513.

  The chance outlet 2514 in the stage 2510 is formed at a position below the center of the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction in the flange portion 2502a so as to open toward the front. The chance outlet 2514 is provided with a pair of protrusions extending in the front-rear direction and separated from each other in the left-right direction in a passage communicating with the chance inlet 2513. As a result, the game ball discharged from the chance outlet 2514 is discharged into the game area 1100 in a state where the swinging in the left-right direction is suppressed by being guided forward by the pair of protrusions. There is.

  On the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the chance outlet 2514 is located immediately above the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 in the assembled state, and the game ball is in the game area 1100 from the chance outlet 2514. When it is discharged to the first starting port 2101 with a high probability.

  Further, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is formed of a transparent member in its entirety, and can be illuminated and decorated by the under-center decorative substrate 2521. The first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are integrally formed by a stage member 2515 and are attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502.

  Further, the number-of-holds display 2530 of the center accessory 2500 includes a number-of-holds display board 2531 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and LEDs of the number-of-holds display board 2531 arranged on the front of the number-of-holds display board 2531. The grid-shaped light-shielding member 2532 for partitioning, the light-guiding member 2533 arranged in each lattice of the light-shielding member 2532 for guiding the light from the LEDs of the retained number display substrate 2531 forward, and the light-guiding members 2533 forward. A front cover 2534 having a plurality of openings facing each other and arranged on the front side of the light blocking member 2532, a front cover 2534, a light blocking member 2532, and a top cover 2535 covering the upper side of the number-of-holding display board 2531 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the upper surface cover 2535 of the number-of-holds display 2530 is inclined so that the left end side in front view becomes lower, and the center in the left-right direction is formed in an arc shape bulging upward. The upper surface cover 2535 is arranged between the stage 2510 and the front right middle rendering unit 2600 (front right middle movable decoration body 2610), and the game ball deviates from the stage 2510 to the front right middle rendering unit 2600 side. Also, it can be returned to the stage 2510 side. The top cover 2535 is formed integrally with the unit base 2502.

  Although the details of the decoration of the front effect unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 are omitted, a front decorative member 2551 having a translucent shape in which a logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is formed in a shallow relief, A plate-shaped diffused light guide member 2552 that is disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 2551 and is capable of diffusing light, and a logo decoration substrate 2553 that is disposed on the upper side of the diffused light guide member 2552 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower surface thereof. , Are provided. The diffusion light guide member 2552 and the front decoration member 2551 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502. The front production unit 2550 can perform light emission decoration by appropriately causing the LEDs of the logo decoration substrate 2553 to emit light.

  The table right center effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is a table having a fixed decorative body 2620 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and an annular rotating decorative body 2630 that surrounds the fixed decorative body 2620 and is rotatable. The right middle movable decoration body 2610, the front right middle decoration board 2640 arranged on the rear side of the front right middle decoration body 2610 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear right middle decoration board 2640 are arranged on the rear side. After the unit base 2502, which supports the rotation driving mechanism 2650 that rotationally drives the rotating decoration body 2630 of the table right middle movable decoration body 2610, the rotation driving mechanism 2650, the table right middle movable decoration body 2610, and the table right middle decoration substrate 2640. And a base member 2660 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the side, and a rotation that rotates the base member 2660 within a predetermined angle range. Is provided with a moving mechanism 2670, the. The base member 2660 is rotatably supported by a support pin 2601 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2502.

  The fixed decorative body 2620 of the table right middle movable decoration body 2610 of the table right middle presentation unit 2600 is a transparent front decoration body 2621 in which the outer circumference is circular and the front surface bulges forward and the front surface is irregularly pierced in the front-rear direction. And a disc-shaped rear decoration body 2622 having a translucent property, which is disposed inside the front decoration body 2621 and has a front surface that swells forward more slowly than the front surface of the front decoration body 2621 and has a predetermined letter embossed on the front surface. , Are provided. The front right middle decorative board 2640 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear side of the rear decorative body 2622, so that the rear decorative body 2622 and the front decorative body 2621 can be illuminated and decorated. There is.

  In addition, the fixed decorative body 2620 further includes a light shielding member 2623 that is arranged on the outer periphery of the front decorative body 2621 and that has a plurality of radially protruding partitions 2623a in the circumferential direction. In addition, the front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 includes a plurality of lens portions 2621a that radially protrude from the outer periphery and that are respectively arranged between the partitions 2623a of the light shielding member 2623. The front end of the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 is formed in a star shape. The partition 26223a and the lens portion 2621a of the fixed decorative body 2620 are located inside the rotary decorative body 2630. The front right middle decoration board 2640 has LEDs mounted on the rear side of the lens section 2621a, and the star-shaped tip of the lens section 2621a can be decorated with light emission. .

  The front decorative body 2621 of the fixed decorative body 2620 is attached to the base member 2660 via the annular spacer member 2624 with the rear decorative body 2622, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 being sandwiched. Has become.

  The rotary ornament 2630 of the front right middle movable ornament 2610 is formed in an annular shape, and the predetermined ornament is three-dimensionally formed on the surface, and the ornaments penetrate each other in the front-rear direction. ing. Further, the rotating decoration body 2630 is formed in a state where the rear side and the inner peripheral side are open, and the lens portion 2621a of the front decoration body 2621 in the fixed decoration body 2620, the light shielding member 2623, and the front right middle decoration substrate 2640 are formed. It is designed to be inserted inside. The rotary ornament 2630 has a rear end extending rearward from the front right center decorative substrate 2640 and is rotatable with respect to the base member 2660 by being attached to an annular actuating gear 2654 of a rotary drive mechanism 2650 described later. It is supposed to be supported by.

  This rotating decoration body 2630 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting light from the LED located on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a of the front decoration body 2621 on the front right middle decoration substrate 2640.

  The rotary drive mechanism 2650 of the front right center production unit 2600 is mounted on the base member 2660 via the motor base 2665 at a position above the rotary ornament 2630, and the rotary drive mechanism 2650 of the front first drive motor 2651. A drive gear 2652 fixed to the rotating shaft, a transmission gear 2653 meshed with the drive gear 2652 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660, and a transmission gear 2653 meshed with the transmission gear 2653 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660 and the front surface. And an annular actuating gear 2654 to which the rotary ornament 2630 is attached.

  The front drive motor 2651 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 is attached to the front side of the motor base 2665, and the rotary shaft extends through the motor base 2665 to the rear side. The drive gear 2652 and the transmission gear 2653 are arranged between the motor base 2665 and the base member 2660.

  The operating gear 2654 of the rotary drive mechanism 2650 has a circular guide hole 2654a that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the center. The operating gear 2654 is arranged between the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624, and is rotatably supported in the guide hole 2654a via a bush 2656 axially supported by the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624. .

  Further, the rotation drive mechanism 2650 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2655 capable of detecting the rotation position of the rotary ornament 2630. The rotary drive mechanism 2650 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 2652a extending outward on the drive gear 2652. By detecting the detection piece 2652a with the rotation position detection sensor 2655, the rotation position of the rotary ornament 2630 is detected. Can be detected.

  The base member 2660 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is formed so as to cover the rear side of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 and the rotation drive mechanism 2650. The base member 2660 includes an arm portion 2661 extending upward from a portion supporting the front right middle movable decoration body 2610, and a bearing formed at the tip of the arm portion 2661 and rotatably supported with respect to the unit base 2502. A slit 2663 formed in the arm portion 2661 between the portion 2662 and the bearing portion 2662 and the portion supporting the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 and extending long along the radiation passing through the center of the bearing portion 2661 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. And are equipped with. The base member 2660 is configured such that a support pin 2601 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502 so as to extend rearward is inserted into the bearing portion 2662, and is rotatably supported by the support pin 2601. It is like this.

  Further, the motor base 2665 attached to the front side of the base member 2660 includes a guide piece 2664 that extends in an arc shape around the bearing portion 2662 at the lower end corresponding to the lower side of the front right middle movable decoration body 2610. . The guide piece 2664 has a plate-shaped portion extending in the front-rear direction at the outer peripheral end centered on the bearing portion 2662, and inside the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. It is designed to be inserted into. As a result, the guide piece 2664 suppresses sway in the front-rear direction when the base member 2660 is rotated.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is located on an extension line of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 on the right side in front view. As a result, when the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is rotated from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction in front view by the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the guide piece 2664 is positioned so as to cover the upper part of the right end of the first stage 2511. As a result (see FIG. 157), even if the game ball bounces from the first stage 2511 to the right, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the rotary ornament 2630 of the front right middle movable ornament 2610. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game ball from being spoiled by the rotating ornamental body 2630, which would impair the original movement of the game ball and give the player a feeling of distrust. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the guide piece 2664 is inclined such that the left end side surface in front view becomes lower at the left end. As a result, when the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is in the normal position, the left end of the guide piece 2664 and the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520 cause the rotary decorative body 2630 to move downward. Since a space capable of accommodating the game ball can be formed, even if the game ball deviates to the right from the right end side of the first stage 2511, the game ball can be held and held in the aforementioned space to move the game ball. Can be stopped, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving differently from what it should be.

  The game ball accommodated and held in the space described above is moved (rotated) from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction in front view by moving the movable decoration body 2610 in the front right to the diagonally the left end of the guide piece 2664. The side surface thus rolled rolls to the left (toward the first stage 2511) and is sent back to the stage 2510. Therefore, depending on the speed of moving the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position, it is possible to fly the game ball accommodated and held at the left end of the guide piece 2664 to the stage 2510 side (FIG. 158). Therefore, it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and entertaining the movement of the game medium to the player to lower the interest. Can be suppressed.

  The rotary drive mechanism 2670 of the front right center performance unit 2600 has a front second drive motor 2671 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 such that the rotary shaft extends in the front-rear direction, and a rotary shaft of the second front drive motor 2671. It is provided with a disk-shaped link wheel 2672 that is fixed, and a link pin 2673 that is supported at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the link wheel 2672 and is slidably inserted into the slit 2663 of the base member 2660.

  Further, the rotation drive mechanism 2670 includes a rotation position detection sensor 2674 that is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 and detects the rotation position of the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 via the base member 2660. The rotation position detection sensor 2674 is attached at a position where the front end of the guide piece 2664 of the motor base 2665 attached to the unit base 2660 can be detected.

  In this rotation drive mechanism 2670, when the link wheel 2672 is rotated by the second drive motor 2671, the link pin 2673 revolves around the circumference of a predetermined radius, and the link pin 2673 revolves. At the same time when the link pin 2673 slides in the slit 2663, the link pin 2673 presses the inner wall of the slit 2663 in a predetermined direction, and the base member 2660 rotates about the bearing portion 2662 (support pin 2601). There is.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the link pin 2673 is arranged between the bearing portion 2662 of the base member 2660 and the front right middle movable decoration body 2610. Therefore, the front right middle movable decoration body is larger than the revolution diameter of the link pin 2673. The 2610 can be moved greatly. In the front-right middle rendering unit 2600 of this example, the front-right middle movable decorative body 2610 is positioned by the rotation movement mechanism 2670 at the normal position where the window 2501 is located on the right side when viewed from the front, and when the window 2501 is viewed from the center when viewed from the front. It can be rotated between the appearance position located at.

  The link wheel 2672 of the rotary drive mechanism 2670 is located on the front side of the partition member 2520, and a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof faces the window 2501 (see FIGS. 112 and 133). As a result, a worker such as maintenance can rotate the link wheel 2672 by touching the outer periphery of the link wheel 2672 from the front side of the center accessory 2500 (game board 4), and thus the base member 2660 (movable decoration on the right front) Even if the body 2610) stops at a rotation position other than a predetermined position, the link wheel 2672 can be rotated from the front side to return the base member 2660 to the normal position without disassembling the center accessory 2500. It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for maintenance and the like, and to shorten the time during which the game is interrupted due to the occurrence of a defect as much as possible, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. You can do it.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the front right center effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is in the normal position in which the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is located on the rightmost side in the front view, and the support pin 2601 (bearing portion). The support pin 2601, the link wheel 2672, and the like are arranged so that a vertical line passing through the center of 2662) passes between the center of the link wheel 2672 and the link pin 2673. As a result, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be rotated to the left side when viewed from the front, and the appearance position of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is moved closer to the center to make it easier for the player to pay attention. Is able to. When the movable decoration body 2610 in the front right is returned from the appearance position to the normal position, the revolving link pin 2673 moves across the vertical line passing through the center of the support pin 2601. During the period from reaching the vertical line to revolving to the normal position, the load from the table right middle movable decoration 2610 acts on the link pin 2673 and the table second drive motor 2671 is loaded, and the table right middle movable decoration is It may be possible that the body 2610 cannot return to the normal position, but as described above, the link pin 2673 is operated by rotating the link wheel 2672 which is partially exposed in the frame of the center accessory 2500. The movable decoration body 2610 in the front right can be returned to the normal position by revolving.

  The front right outside effect unit 2700 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged below the front right middle movable decoration 2610 in a state where the front right middle movable decoration 2610 is in the normal position, and has a front with a predetermined character decoration. The right middle lower decoration member 2710, the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711 arranged on the rear side of the front right middle lower decoration member 2710 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front right middle lower decoration member 2710 on the front surface A table right middle upper decoration member 2720 having decorations of different characters and arranged on the upper side of the table right middle movable decoration body 2610, and a table right middle upper decoration body 2720 and a table right middle lower decoration body 2710 between the table right middle The arc-shaped front right middle outer peripheral decoration member 2730, which is arranged so as to surround the right outer circumference of the fixed decorative body 2620 in the movable decorative body 2610 and widens upward, the front right middle outer peripheral decoration member 2730, and the right front middle upper part. Of the decorative member 2720 A plurality of LED on the front is disposed on the side is implemented as a table right in the outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733, and a.

  The front right middle lower decorative member 2710 of the front outer right effect unit 2700 is formed so that the character portion has a light-transmitting property, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 to partially cover the peripheral wall portion 2503. Is forming. The front right middle lower decoration member 2710 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502 at a position on the right side of the front view holding number display 2530 so as to sandwich the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711. This front right middle lower decoration member 2710 can be light-embellished by appropriately causing the LEDs of the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711 to emit light.

  The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 is formed in a plate shape so that the character portion has a light transmitting property, and is attached to the upper front surface of the front right middle outer peripheral decorative member 2730. The front right middle upper decorative member 2720 can be light-embellished by appropriately causing the corresponding LED on the front right middle outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733 to emit light.

  The front right middle outer peripheral decoration member 2730 of the front right outside production unit 2700 has a frame shape having a plurality of openings whose outer shape is an arc shape whose width becomes wider as it goes upward and whose circumferential length becomes longer as it goes upward. A frame member 2731 and a lens member 2732 that is arranged on the rear side of the frame member 2731 and has a block portion that is inserted into each opening of the frame member 2731 and that has a light-transmitting property are provided. In this front right middle outer circumference decoration body 2730, a frame member 2731 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502, and a lens member 2732 and a front right middle outer circumference decoration substrate 2733 are sandwiched between the frame member 2731 and the unit base 2502. It is supposed to be done. The front right middle outer peripheral decoration substrate 2733 has LEDs arranged at positions corresponding to the openings of the frame member 2731, and it is possible to perform light emission decoration for each opening (block portion of the lens member 2732). There is.

  In the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the outer peripheries of the peripheral wall portions 2503 above and to the right of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front are substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component member 1110A). It has a shape, and when attached to the game panel 1150, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the upper and right peripheral wall portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500. ing. As a result, when the game ball is driven so as to enter the clearance on the right outer periphery (so-called right hit), the game ball enters the guide passage 2142a of the attacker unit 2100, and the gate has an extremely high probability. A game ball can be passed through the section 2105.

  Further, the center role object 2500, when attached to the game panel 1150, has an area of a predetermined width formed on the left outer circumference of the center role object 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. . With this, when the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball flows down in a complicated motion within the area, and the game can be enjoyed by the game ball. It has become. In addition, when the game ball is hit so that it flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball can enter the warp entrance 2504, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation depending on whether or not the game ball that is recirculated and released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 is accepted into the first starting opening 2101 or the like, and entertains the player. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[2-4A. Second embodiment of fixed decorative body in front right middle production unit]
Next, a second embodiment of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the front right center rendering unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of a fixed decorative body in the front right middle rendering unit, which is disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the front cover and effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 seen from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is seen from a position slightly leftward with respect to the front. FIG. 6C is a perspective view seen from a position further left than FIG. FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the effect sheet in the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141, (b) is an explanatory view showing a state when the light is turned off, and (c) is a light emitting decoration mode when the blue light is turned on. And (d) is an explanatory view showing a light emitting decoration mode when red light is lit. The members having the same structure are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fixed decorative body 2620A of this example can replace the front decorative body 2621 and the rear decorative body 2622 of the fixed decorative body 2620 described above. As shown in the figure, the fixed decorative body 2620A is disposed in the front cover 2625 and a transparent front cover 2625 having a circular outer periphery, a front surface bulging forward and a shallow relief having a predetermined shape formed on the front surface. Thin production sheet 2626, a thin diffusion lens sheet 2627 disposed on the rear side of the production sheet 2626 and having a plurality of fine prisms, and a front cover disposed on the rear side of the diffusion lens sheet 2627. And a transparent disc-shaped holding member 2628 to be inserted into 2625.

  In this fixed decorative body 2620A, the effect sheet 2626 is composed of a light-transmitting, smoked base film and a colored layer formed on the back surface of the base film, so that it looks dark when viewed from the front side. (See FIG. 144 (b)). When viewed from the front, the fixed decorative body 2620A has a relief-like decoration formed on the front cover 2625 on the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 (see FIG. 143). As a result, when the fixed decorative body 2620A is viewed from the front without being illuminated, the relief of the front cover 2625 and the relief reflected in the effect sheet 2626, and the distance between the front surface of the front cover 2625 and the front surface of the effect sheet 2626. Due to the difference between the two, the relief of the front cover 2625 looks three-dimensional more like a decoupage, and the player can be presented with an unprecedented decoration, as shown in FIGS. 143 (b) and (c). In addition, since the appearance changes depending on the player's viewing position, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, in the fixed decorative body 2620A, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the colored layer in the effect sheet 2626 has a black portion 2626a having almost no translucency, a translucent blue portion 2626b, and a translucent blue portion 2626b. It is composed of a red portion 2626c having a light property and an uncolored portion 2626d which is not colored. As a result, when the LED located on the rear side of the fixed decorative body 2620A on the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 is not emitting light, the smoked color of the base film makes the whole black and the pattern visible as shown in FIG. 144 (b). On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit blue light, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (c), and when it emits red light with the pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (d). ing.

  More specifically, in the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 in the fixed decorative body 2620A, when the design shown in FIG. 144 (c) and the design shown in FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped with each other, a portion not included in any design is black. 2626a, and a portion included in any of the patterns is an uncolored portion 2626d. Also, when the design of FIG. 144 (c) and the design of FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped, the portion of only the design of FIG. 144 (c) is the blue portion 2626b, and the design of FIG. 144 (d). The only part is the red part 2626c. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit blue light, light is transmitted through the blue portion 2626b and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the red portion 2626c. Therefore, the pattern as shown in FIG. The imitation pattern) will emit blue light. When the LED is made to emit red light, light is transmitted through the red portion 2626c and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the blue portion 2626b. Therefore, the pattern (characters as shown in FIG. The imitation pattern) will emit red light. When the LED is made to emit white light, a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (a) emits light.

  As described above, the fixed decorative body 2620A gives a stereoscopic effect by reflecting the relief formed on the front cover 2625 on the effect sheet 2626 when the LED of the front right middle decorative substrate 2640 arranged on the rear side is not lit. While it is possible to present a certain decoration, it is possible to display different patterns in accordance with the color of light emitted from the LED so that various effects can be presented to the player so that the player is less tired of it. Note that the relief of the front cover 2625 has substantially the same shape as the pattern that is emitted and displayed when the LED is made to emit blue light, and as a result, the relief pattern of the front cover 2625 is combined with the relief to give a three-dimensional effect. Can be given.

[2-5. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. 145 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. Also, FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into the main constituent members and seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into the main constituent members and seen from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the back side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the back wall 3010a is provided with an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 3010. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is a box-shaped opening on the front side, and has a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating the back wall 3010a in the front-rear direction, and extends outward from the outer periphery of the front end and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150. And a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d that is recessed toward the front in the same size as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a, and a rear view of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the right side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and the liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side of the liquid crystal inserting portion 3010d (right side in rear view) and the locking mechanism 3040. And a lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f to which is mounted. In this back box 3010, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a inside the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d is a flat surface. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 abuts.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the performance units 3100, 3300, 3500, boards, covers, etc. at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted near the front end of the back box 3010 near the front end of the back lower decoration board 3020, which is mounted at a position corresponding to the front side unit 2200 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Attached to a position corresponding to the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100, a lower right rear decorative substrate 3021 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and an upper side of the opening 3010b in the rear box 3010 are attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a. The back upper relay board 3022, the back right relay board 3023 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 in front view, and the back right relay board 3023 in the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear wall 3010a in front view. And a rear left relay board 3024 attached to the front surface.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board 3025 that is attached to a rear lower surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b in a lower left corner in rear view, and a rear box disposed on the right side of the panel relay board 3025 in rear view. A first drive board 3026 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back cover 3010; and a second drive board 3027 arranged on the right side of the first drive board 3026 in rear view and attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. ing.

  The rear unit 3000 includes a panel relay board cover 3030 that covers the rear side of the panel relay board 3025 and is attached to the back box 3010, and a first drive board cover that covers the rear side of the first drive board 3026 and is attached to the back box 3010. 3031 and a second drive substrate cover 3032 that covers the rear side of the second drive substrate 3027 and is attached to the back box 3010.

  The back unit 3000 also includes a lock mechanism 3040 on the back surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 for removably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. The lock mechanism 3040 of this example is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the lock mechanism mounting portion 3010f of the back box 3010. When the lock mechanism 3040 is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved backward. When an insertion opening that can be inserted from the side is opened, and the locking piece 3040 is slid upward after inserting the fixing piece 1902 from the insertion opening, the rear end of the insertion opening is closed and the fixing piece 1902 does not come off. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a plate-shaped back left holder 3050 attached in the vicinity of the front end at the left end in the back box 3010 and a vertically extending plate-shaped back left holder 3050, and a second starting opening of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010. A back right guide member 3060 attached at a position corresponding to 2102 and a general winning opening 2104 and capable of guiding a game ball, a first starting opening 2101 of an attacker unit 2100 and a front side unit 2200 near the front end in the back box 3010. It is provided with a back left guide member 3070 which is attached at a position corresponding to one general winning opening 2201 and which can guide a game ball.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to predetermined positions of the back left holder 3050 and the back right guiding member 3060 and is capable of detecting magnetism, and a magnetic detection sensor 3080, and is attached to a predetermined position of the back left guiding member 3070. The first starting opening sensor 3081 capable of detecting the game ball received in, and the game balls received in the general winning openings 2104, 2201 attached to the predetermined positions of the back right guiding member 3060 and the back left guiding member 3070, respectively. And a general winning opening sensor 3082 that can be used.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back horizontal production unit 3100 arranged on the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back production unit 3300 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And an underside effect unit 3500 arranged below the opening 3010b in the inside of the back box 3010.

  The lower left decorative substrate 3020 of the rear unit 3000 can cause the front surface unit 2000 to lighten the front side unit 2200 by causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light appropriately. Further, the back lower right decoration substrate 3021 can lighten and decorate the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  The back relay board 3022 in the back unit 3000 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the peripheral control board 4010. The back right relay board 3023 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back horizontal relay board 3112 of the back right effect unit 3100R in the back side effect unit 3100. The back left relay board 3024 is for relaying the connection between the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 and the back horizontal relay board 3112 of the back left effect unit 3100L in the back side effect unit 3100.

  The panel relay board 3025 in the back unit 3000 connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, and the main control board 4100 and the first starting opening sensor 3082, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning opening. It is for relaying connections with the sensor 3082, the gate sensor 2126, the starting opening solenoid 2124, the attacker solenoid 2113, and the like.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 in the back unit 3000 are based on the control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, which are provided in the door frame 5. 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and the LED mounted on each of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130 and the like provided on the game board 4. Based on a control signal (command) from the light emission control or the peripheral control board 4010, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 and the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159 provided in the game board 4, It is for controlling the drive of 3302, 3506 and the like.

  The back left holder 3050 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the warp entrance 2504 in the center accessory 2500, and uses a magnet to guide the game ball to the warp entrance 2504. It is possible to detect illegal acts.

  The back right guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 supports the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the first starting opening 2101 in the center accessory 2500, and uses a magnet to make the game ball the first starting opening. It is possible to detect a fraudulent act that leads to 2101.

  The back right guiding member 3060 is arranged on the rear side of the second unit 2120 and the third unit 2130 in the attacker unit 2100, and has an upper opening 3061 on the front surface of the upper end portion that can communicate with the general winning opening 2104. An intermediate opening 3062, which can communicate with the second starting port 2102, is provided on the front surface of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back right guiding member 3060 has a right guiding passage extending from the upper opening 3061 to the lower end to allow the game balls to flow and the lower end opening downward. The middle opening 3062 communicates with the middle of the right guiding passage, and the game balls that have entered the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 are both discharged downward from the lower end by the right guiding passage.

  As a result, the back right guide member 3060 is received in the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and the game ball guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the right guide passage from the upper opening 3061. At the same time, the game ball that is received in the second starting opening 2102 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the right guide passage through the middle opening 3062. In the back right guiding member 3060, a general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached to a position between the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 in the right guiding passage, and the upper opening 3061, that is, the general winning opening 2104 is a game ball. Only can detect.

  The back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 extends over the portion of the attacker unit 2100 where the first starting opening 2101 is arranged and the portion of the front side unit 2200 where the three general winning openings 2201 are arranged. It is arranged on the rear side. A middle guiding passage 3071 in which the game ball can be circulated in the vertical direction at the right end in front view and the upper end can communicate with the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the left side of the middle guiding passage 3071 in front view. It is provided with three left openings 3072 formed on the front surface and capable of communicating with the respective general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200.

  A lower end of the middle guide passage 3071 of the back left guide member 3070 is opened downward, and the opened front side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100. As a result, the game ball received in the first starting port 2101 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the middle guiding passage 3071 from the upper end portion, is guided downward by the middle guiding passage 3071, and is guided from the lower end. It is designed to be discharged downward. In addition, the first starting opening sensor 3081 is attached near the upper portion and the lower portion of the middle guiding passage 3071 so that one gaming ball is detected twice. That is, although details are omitted, the acceptance (winning) of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 is determined based on the detection pattern of the detection signal of the game ball from the two first starting opening sensors 3081. When a detection pattern different from the preset regular detection pattern is detected, for example, it is determined that a fraudulent act such as putting a fraudulent tool in and out of the first starting opening 2101 is performed, and A predetermined game process is performed.

  The back left guide member 3070, though not shown, has a left guide passage on the left side of the middle guide passage 3071 when viewed from the front, which has three outlets 3072 communicating with the three left openings 3072 and a discharge opening at the lower end through which game balls can pass. I have it. A general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached to the outlet of the left guiding passage, and any one of the three general winning openings 2201 can receive a game ball, which is detected by one general winning opening sensor 3082. ing.

[2-6. Back side production unit]
Next, the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 156. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back side effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. Further, FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back side rendering unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back side rendering unit disassembled into main components and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of one rotary decorative body unit in the back horizontal rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of one rotary decorative body unit in the rear horizontal rendering unit as seen from the rear. In addition, FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary decorative body unit of the back horizontal rendering unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary decorative body unit of the rear horizontal rendering unit disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure.

  The back horizontal production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and on both left and right sides, and is attached at positions above and below the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. In the back horizontal production unit 3100, the back right production unit 3100R disposed on the right side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and the back right production unit 3100R are formed substantially symmetrically with each other and the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 is formed. The back left effect unit 3100L, which is arranged on the left side in the front view, and the back left effect unit 3100L and the back right effect unit 3100R can be independently moved in the left and right directions, and the upper side and the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. And a back horizontal slide unit 3150 disposed in the.

  The back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L in the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 are supported by the back horizontal slide unit 3150 so that the upper and lower ends thereof can slide in the left-right direction, and face the front side and the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. A vertically long box-shaped back horizontal base 3110 whose side facing the center in the left-right direction is open, and a front side of the back horizontal base 3110 which can cover a part of each of the open front side and the center-facing side of the back horizontal base 3110. Inside the box-shaped back horizontal base 3110, a back horizontal decorative member 3111 mounted on the back horizontal base 3111, a vertical rear horizontal relay board 3112 mounted on the outer side of the back horizontal base 3111 opposite to the open center side. And three rotating ornament body units 3120 which are attached in a state of being vertically arranged.

  The back horizontal base 3110 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L is formed such that the vertical height thereof is slightly higher than the vertical height of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010. Further, the back horizontal base 3110 includes a slider mounting portion 3110a protruding upward from the upper end front surface and connected to the lower end of the right connecting member 3157 or the left connecting member 3162 of the rear horizontal slide unit 3150, and protruding downward from the lower end and extending in the left-right direction. The lower right guide member 3170R or the lower left guide member 3170L of the back horizontal slide unit 3150 and the guided portion 3110b inserted and guided therein. The back horizontal base 3110 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

  The back horizontal decoration members 3111 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are located at positions corresponding to the rotary decorative bodies 3126 of the three rotary decorative units 3120 mounted in the back horizontal base 3110. A plurality of cutout portions 3111a are provided so as to face the front side of 3126 and the side of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 facing the center in the left-right direction. This back horizontal decoration member 3111 is a portion between the cutouts 3111a, and it is possible to hide the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 located above and below the rotary decorative body 3126 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 from the player side. You can do it.

  In addition, the back horizontal decoration member 3111 has a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of penetrating front and rear directions along the decoration at positions corresponding to the back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 in the rotary decoration unit 3120. Has an opening 3111b. Thereby, the light from the back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 can be directly radiated forward through the opening 3111b of the back horizontal decoration member 3111.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3120 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L is a plate-shaped lower base 3121 extending in the left-right direction, and the front of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 from the center of the lower base 3121 in the left-right direction. A box-shaped upper base 3122 mounted on the upper side opposite to the side facing the center in the left-right direction, and a back lateral rotation drive mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 3122 so that the rotation shaft extends to the lower base 3121 side. A motor 3123, a drive gear 3124 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123, and is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, meshes with the drive gear 3124, and has the same diameter as the drive gear 3124. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 3125 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121; A rotating decorative body 3126 attached to the upper surface of the dynamic gear 3125 and extending in the vertical direction and having a bottomed cylindrical shape and an outer periphery formed into a substantially square shape, and a rotating position of the rotating decorative body 3126 that can be detected and attached to the upper base 3122. And a rotational position detection sensor 3127.

  Also, the rotary ornament unit 3120 is inserted into the rotary ornament 3126 from above, and has a top end attached to the upper base 3122 and a vertically extending semi-cylindrical lens member 3128, and a chord side of the lens member 3128. Mounted on the lens member 3128 side and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface of the vertically long rotating decorative body decoration board 3129, and the upper base 3122 is mounted on the front surface at a substantially center in the left-right direction and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a back horizontal decorative substrate 3130.

  The lower base 3121 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 is formed to have a length in the front-rear direction that is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the rotary decoration 3126, and is located on the opposite side of the drive gear 3124 with the driven gears 3125 at the left and right ends sandwiched therebetween. The end portion is formed in a semicircular shape that is substantially concentric with the shaft center of the driven gear 3125. The lower base 3121 also includes a drive shaft portion 3121a that rotatably supports the drive gear 3124 and extends upward, and a driven shaft portion 3121b that rotatably supports the driven gear 3125 and extends upward. . The drive shaft portion 3121a is adapted to be inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) formed in the lower surface of the drive gear 3124. Further, the driven shaft portion 3121b is adapted to be inserted through the bush 3131 into the shaft hole 3125a penetrating the shaft core of the driven gear 3125.

  The upper base 3122 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 is arranged on the side supporting the drive gear 3124 from the center of the lower base 3121 in the left-right direction, and the lower side and the driven gear 3125 side (the side of the opening 3010b facing the center in the left-right direction) are opened. Box-shaped main body 3122a, a standing wall 3122b extending upward from the opened driven gear 3125 side at the upper end of the main body 3122a, and a lower base 3121 from the upper end of the standing wall 3122b to the driven gear 3125 side. And a top plate portion 3122c extending in parallel. In the rotary decorative body unit 3120 of this example, a rotary decorative body 3126 that is rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction is arranged between the lower base 3121 and the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122.

  The upper base 3122 is configured such that the lower end of the main body portion 3122a is attached to the lower base 3121. The upper base 3122 is configured such that a back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 3122a. The upright wall portion 3122b of the upper base 3122 extends higher than the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the main body portion 3122a. The top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122 has a semicircular shape at the tip opposite to the standing wall 3122b, and the lens member 3128 is attached to the lower surface.

  An annular upper guide 3132 having a cylindrical guide tube (not shown) inserted into the rotary ornament 3126 is attached to the lower surface of the top plate 3122c of the upper base 3122. ing. In the upper guide 3132, the outer diameter of the guide cylinder inserted into the rotary ornament 3126 is slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotary ornament 3126, and the upper end side of the rotary ornament 3126 is Can be rotatably supported.

  The drive gear 3124 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 has a shaft portion 3124a whose upper end is fixed to the rotation shaft of the lateral lateral rotation drive motor 3123 and extends downward, and a flat gear which is formed at the lower end of the shaft portion 3124a and meshes with the driven gear 3125. A gear-shaped gear portion 3124b, a detection piece 3124c that extends in a fan shape in a direction perpendicular to the axis from a substantially vertical center of the shaft portion 3124a, and a shaft hole that is recessed upward from the lower surface side at the center of the gear portion 3124b (not shown). ), And are provided. The drive gear 3124 has a shaft hole inserted into the drive shaft portion 3121a of the lower base 3121, so that the rotation axis core of the gear portion 3124b arranged far from the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 does not easily swing. Has become. Further, the detection piece 3124c is adapted to be detected by a rotational position detection sensor 3127 attached inside the main body portion 3122a of the upper base 3122. By detecting the detection piece 3124c of the drive gear 3124, the rotary ornament 3126 is detected. The rotation position of can be detected.

  As shown in the figure, the rotary decoration body 3126 of the rotary decoration body unit 3120 is formed into a bottomed cylindrical shape whose outer circumference extends in a substantially square shape in the vertical direction. It is rotatable about an axis extending in the up-and-down direction with the center as a substantial axis. The rotating ornament 3126 has a light-transmitting property, and different decorations are applied to the four outer peripheral surfaces thereof.

  The lens member 3128 and the rotary decorative body decorative substrate 3129 of the rotary decorative body unit 3120 have a length extending from the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 to the vicinity of the lower end of the rotary decorative body 3126 in the assembled state. The whole 3126 in the up-down direction can be decorated to emit light substantially uniformly. In addition, the lens member 3128 having a semicircular cross-section has a chord direction that extends in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (a surface parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1150) with respect to the left and right openings 3101b in the back box 3010. It is attached to the upper base 3122 in a state in which the center side in the direction is inclined so as to retract (for example, in a state in which it is inclined by about 30 degrees in a plan view). As a result, the front surface of the rotating decorative body decoration substrate 3129 attached to the chord side of the lens member 3128 faces the player side, so that the player feels brighter when the rotating decorative body 3126 is illuminated. Has become.

  The back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 of the rotary decoration unit 3120 is attached to the front side of the main body 3122a of the upper base 3122 so as to extend to the upper end of the standing wall 3122b. This back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 is adapted to allow the back horizontal decoration member 3111 to emit light from the rear side by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  As shown in the figure, the rotary ornament unit 3120 of the present embodiment, in an assembled state, is a surface of the outer periphery of the rotary ornament 3126 that faces away from the center of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. Except for, the three sides can be exposed. Further, in the rotary ornament unit 3120, the rear surfaces of the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 are attached inside the back horizontal base 3110, respectively.

  The rotary decoration unit 3120 is formed symmetrically with respect to the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L.

  The rear horizontal slide unit 3150 of the rear horizontal production unit 3100 is attached to a position near the front end in the rear box 3010 above the opening 3010b and extends in the left-right direction so as to extend over substantially the entire width, and a unit base 3151. Of the rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 which is attached to the upper rear surface near the right end of the front view and which penetrates the unit base 3151 to extend the rotary shaft forward, and a flat fixed to the rotary shaft of the rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152. A gear-shaped drive gear 3153, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3154 rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 and meshing with the drive gear 3153 at a position on the left side of the drive gear 3153 in front view, and a first transmission gear 3154. The first transmission gear 3154 is rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at the position on the left side in front view. It has a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3155 that meshes with it, and a rack gear 3156a that extends in the left-right direction that meshes with the second transmission gear 3155. The unit base 3151 has a left-right front position lower than the second transmission gear 3155. A plate-shaped right slider 3156 slidably supported in the direction, and a right connecting member having an upper end attached to the lower end of the right slider 3156 and a lower end attached to the slider attachment portion 3110a of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right performance unit 3100R. 3157 and.

  In addition, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is equipped with a right slide position detection sensor 3158 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and capable of detecting the horizontal slide position of the back right effect unit 3100R. The right slide position detection sensor 3158 detects the slide position of the back right performance unit 3100R via the right slider 3156 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the right slider 3156. You can do it.

  Further, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the upper rear surface on the left side of the center of the unit base 3151 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a back horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 penetrating the unit base 3151 and extending the rotation axis forward. The rear side left slide drive motor 3159 has a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3160 fixed to the rotary shaft and a rack gear 3161a extending in the left-right direction that meshes with the drive gear 3160. A plate-shaped left slider 3161 supported slidably in the left-right direction at the side front surface, and an upper end attached to the lower end of the left slider 3161, and the lower end is a slider attachment portion of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back left production unit 3100L. And a left connecting member 3162 attached to the 3110a.

  Further, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is provided with a left slide position detection sensor 3163 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and capable of detecting the left-right slide position of the back left effect unit 3100L. This left slide position detection sensor 3163 detects a slide position of the back left performance unit 3100L via the left slider 3161 by detecting a detection piece (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the left slider 3161. You can do it.

  The back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3151 and includes a plate-shaped unit cover 3165 that covers the front sides of the drive gears 3153, 3160, the right slider 3156, the left slider 3161 and the like.

  Further, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, the upper side is opened, and extends in the left-right direction. The lower right-side slide unit 3150 guides the lower end of the right-right production unit 3100R slidably in the left-right direction. A lower guide member 3170R and a lower left guide member that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and is open on the upper side and extends in the left-right direction so as to guide the lower end of the back left effect unit 3100L to be slidable in the left-right direction. 3170L. The lower right guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member 3170L are adapted to be slidably inserted from above from the guided portion 3110b of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. The back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L can be slidably guided in the left-right direction via the guided portion 3110b.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150 are respectively provided with rack gears 3156a and 3161a formed at the upper ends thereof so as to extend in the left-right direction, and from the left-right direction end portions of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 toward the left-right center. A detection piece (not shown) that extends upward in a plate shape, and a guide groove (not shown) that is open at the rear side and extends in the left-right direction and that is formed in parallel with each other in the vertical direction are provided. There is.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured such that a plurality of rollers (not shown) rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3151 are inserted into the guide grooves on the rear surface. You can slide to the left and right. Further, the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured to be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the unit cover 3164 and the unit base 3151.

  The back horizontal slide unit 3150 of the back horizontal extension unit 3100 rotates the back horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 and the back horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 in an appropriate direction to move the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 within a predetermined range. Can be independently slid in the left-right direction, and thus, the rear right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering can be performed via the right connecting member 3157 and the left connecting member 3162 attached to the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161. The unit 3100L can be slid horizontally.

  The back horizontal production unit 3100 of the present embodiment is configured to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction in each of the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L which are arranged apart from each other in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The three rotating decorations 3126 are coaxially arranged in the vertical direction, and the rotating decorations 3126 vertically arranged are opposed to each other in the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L. It is located in. The back horizontal production unit 3100 of this example uses the back horizontal slide unit 3150 to separate the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L from a position where they are most separated from each other (retracted position) and a position that is closest to them (appearing position). Each can be independently slid to the left and right. In the state where the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are at the most separated positions, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are respectively located outside the window part 2501 in the front view in the center accessory 2500. , Is invisible from the player side (see FIG. 110, etc.). Then, this state is a normal game state.

  On the other hand, in the back horizontal rendering unit 3100, when the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are moved to the positions where they are closest to each other, the rotary ornaments 3126 rotatably supported by each of them are at the center. The rotary ornaments 3126, which are positioned inside the window portion 2501 of the accessory 2500 in a front view and are vertically arranged from the player side, are visible (see FIG. 159). Further, in the state where the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are closest to each other, the size of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 facing the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is approximately larger than that in the normal state. It is supposed to be half the size.

  This back side production unit 3100 is designed to be movable according to a special lottery result that is drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102.

[2-7. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

  The back production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 of this embodiment is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and is arranged behind the unit base 3151 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150 in the back horizontal production unit 3100. There is. The back production unit 3300 is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends in the left-right direction, and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 near the left end in front view and penetrates the unit base 3301 and has a rotation axis in the front. A rear drive motor 3302 extending to the rear drive motor, a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the rear drive motor 3302, and a rack gear that meshes with the drive gear and extends in an arc shape. An arc-shaped plate-shaped slider (not shown) supported slidably in the circumferential direction by the unit base.

  The back effect unit 3300 includes a back decoration body base 3305 attached to the front surface of a slider (not shown), and a back decoration body 3306 attached to the front surface of the back decoration body base 3305 and having a predetermined decoration. A back decorative board (not shown), which is disposed between the back decorative body 3306 and the back decorative base 3305 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, is provided.

  Further, the back production unit 3300 is disposed on the rear side of the back decoration base 3305 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 and covers the drive gear and the front surface of the slider. 3308 and the unit base 3301 support three front and rear end-shaped cylindrical shaft members (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction at predetermined positions, and the respective shaft members rotatably inserted so that the outer periphery is A plurality of bushes (not shown) capable of contacting the slider are provided. In this back production unit 3300, a slider is supported slidably in the circumferential direction with respect to the unit base 3301 via a shaft member and a bush.

  In addition, the back production unit 3300 is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and a slide position detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting the slide position of the slider, and is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 to provide a back decoration. And a back relay board (not shown) for relaying the connection between the board and the first drive board 3026.

  Although not shown in the figure, the back side effect unit 3300 is provided with magnets on the right side end in front view of the back side decorative body base 3305 and the right side end in front view of the unit base 3301, respectively, and attracts each other. It is installed in the orientation.

  Although not shown, the unit base 3301 of the back production unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front side opened, and can accommodate a drive gear, a slider, and the like. Although not shown, the unit base 3301 is provided with three shaft holes that penetrate the front and rear directions at predetermined positions and into which the rear ends of shaft members (not shown) are inserted.

  Although illustration is omitted, the driving gear of the rear effect unit 3300 has an outer diameter of about 2/3 of the height of the unit base 3301 and has a large spur gear shape. It is regarded as a gear.

  Further, although not shown, the slider of the rear effect unit 3300 extends in an arc shape having a center below the unit base 3301 and is formed with a substantially constant width. A rack gear that meshes with the drive gear is arranged in the. Further, the slider is formed at both ends in the circumferential direction and has mounting portions for mounting the back decoration base 3305, slits penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction at substantially the center in the radial direction, and extending in the circumferential direction. A plate-shaped detection piece formed outside the right end of the rack gear when viewed from the front.

  In the slider of the rear effect unit 3300, a bush inserted into a shaft member whose rear end is supported by a shaft hole of the unit base 3301 comes into contact with the circumferential surface on the radially inner side and the slit. By rotating the contact bush, it can slide smoothly in the circumferential direction. Further, both ends of the slit of the slider are closed, and a bush is brought into contact with an end portion of the slit in the circumferential direction, whereby the sliding range of the slider in the circumferential direction is regulated. Further, the slider of the back production unit 3300 can detect the detection piece by the slide position detection sensor, and the detection piece can detect the slider, that is, the slide position of the back decoration. You can do it.

  Although not shown in detail, the back side decorative body base 3305 of the back side rendering unit 3300 is formed so as to extend along the slider in a front view, the left end side in front view is attached to the left end of the slider, and the right end side is a unit. The base cover 3308 is attached to the right end of the slider through a through hole (not shown) of the base cover 3308. The upper back decorative body base 3305 is formed in a flat plate shape from the center in the left-right direction to the left side when viewed from the front, and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the upper back decorative body 3306.

  The back decoration 3306 of the back production unit 3300 is formed in a shallow (thin) relief shape imitating a clenched fist, and is provided with a translucent decoration portion 3306a made of predetermined characters in a portion corresponding to the back of the hand. (See FIG. 160). The back decorative body 3306 is formed in a state of being almost non-translucent except for the outer periphery and the decorative portion 3306a, and is given a predetermined color by screen printing or the like. Although illustration is omitted, the color of the decoration provided on the front surface of the back decoration 3306 is a color whose brightness becomes lower (darker) as the distance from the outer circumference increases.

  The back decoration board of the back production unit 3300 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the back decoration 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a. As a result, the outer periphery of the back side decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306a can be light-emitted and decorated by the back side decorative substrate.

  The back production unit 3300 of this example is configured to be supported by the unit base 3301 and the unit base cover 3308 so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. This slider is in a state where the chord with respect to the circular arc of the slider is slightly lower on the left side when viewed from the front (with the retracted position), and the chord with respect to the circular arc of the slider is substantially vertical in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to slide in the circumferential direction up to (state of appearance position).

  In the normal state, the back production unit 3300 is in a state in which the left side of the chord with respect to the circular arc of the slider is slightly lower than the horizontal. In this state, the back decorative body 3306 attached to the front side of the slider is shown. However, it is in a state of being positioned directly in front of the unit base 3301. Therefore, in a normal state, the back side decorative body 3306 of the back side effect unit 3300 is positioned above the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is invisible to the player, that is, in the retracted position. It is in a state (see FIG. 110).

  On the other hand, the back production unit 3300 slides the slider in the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front by the drive of the back drive motor 3302, and when the chord of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the arc, the front production unit 3300 moves to the front side of the slider. The attached back upper decoration 3306 is located below the front of the unit base 3301 and the fist is in a downward state. In this state, the back decoration 3306 of the back production unit 3300 hangs down from the upper side of the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 into the window 2501 and is positioned approximately at the center of the window 2501. The state is visible from the side, that is, the state of the appearance position (see FIG. 160).

[2-8. Underside production unit]
Next, the lower back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. The back lower production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged on the rear side of the back left guiding member 3070.

  The underside effect unit 3500 of this example is formed in a substantially symmetrical predetermined shape and has a partially translucent underside decorative body 3501, and a rear side underside decorative body 3501 is arranged on the rear side and on the front side. A lower back decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a slider (not shown) arranged on the rear side of the lower back decorative board and attached to the lower back decoration 3501, and a rear side of the slider. A shallow box-shaped unit cover 3504 which is arranged in the vertical direction and supports the slider so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and whose rear side is open. The unit cover 3504 is attached to the rear side of the unit cover 3504 and is attached to the inside of the back box 3010. A shallow box-shaped unit base 3505 having an open front side, and an underside drive motor 3 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 for vertically sliding the slider. It is provided with a 06, a.

  The underside decorative body 3501 of the underside effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a flame. Although not shown, the sliders of the under-representation production unit 3500 include cylindrical support bosses that are vertically spaced apart from each other at left and right ends and project rearward, and a center in the left-right direction between the support bosses. And a pair of slits which are arranged on both the left and right sides with respect to and which penetrate in the front-back direction and extend in the left-right direction.

  Although not shown, the unit cover 3504 of the underside effect unit 3500 has a pair of elevating guide grooves that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, penetrate the front-rear direction, extend in the up-down direction, and support bosses of the slider are slidably inserted. A through hole portion that is arranged symmetrically with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched between the pair of up-and-down guide grooves, extends in an arc shape so that the center side in the left-right direction bulges, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The unit cover 3504 can support the slider so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a pair of up and down guide grooves.

  The outer shape of the unit base 3505 of the underside effect unit 3500 is the same as the outer shape of the unit cover 3504, and the unit cover 3504 can form a box having a shallow depth in the front-rear direction. . The under-bottom drive motor 3506 of the under-bottom effect unit 3500 is designed to be attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is rotated while attached to the unit base 3505. The shaft penetrates the unit base 3505 and extends to the front side.

  Although not shown in the figure, the underside effect unit 3500 meshes with the drive gear, which is a spur gear fixed between the unit cover 3504 and the unit base 3505 and fixed to the rotation shaft of the underside drive motor 3506. And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505 and disposed on the right side of the drive gear in front view, and the first transmission gear meshes with the first transmission gear and is disposed on the right side of the first transmission gear in front view. The second transmission gear in the form of a spur gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505 meshes with the second transmission gear and is arranged at the same height as the drive gear on the right side of the second transmission gear in front view. The spur gear-shaped third transmission gear rotatably supported by the base 3505 and the drive gear are engaged with each other, and the unit is located at a position on the left side in front view of the drive gear. A fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by a base 3505, an extension piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and a front portion of the unit cover 3504 that protrudes forward from the tip of the extension piece and is on the left side in front view. A left link member having a transmission pin that is slidably inserted through the through hole into the slit on the left side of the slider and a position that is meshed with the third transmission gear and is on the right side of the third transmission gear in front view. The fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by the unit base, the extension piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and the extension piece protruding forward from the tip end of the unit cover 3504 on the right side in front view. A right link member having a transmission pin that penetrates through the through hole and is slidably inserted into the slit on the right side of the slider.

  Although not shown in the figure, the lower back production unit 3500 has a left link member and a right link member which are arranged symmetrically with the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween, and when the back left drive motor 3506 drives the drive gear to rotate. The drive gear and the plurality of transmission gears cause the left link member and the right link member to rotate in mutually opposite directions with their transmission pins at the same height. That is, as the left link member and the right link member rotate, the height position of each transmission pin is changed, and the slider, that is, the lower back decoration 3501 is slid vertically by the transmission pin. It can be raised and lowered.

  Further, although not shown, the underside effect unit 3500 is inserted from the rear side into the support boss of the slider which is inserted into the elevating guide groove in the unit cover 3504, and is arranged between the supporting boss and the elevating guide groove. An elevating bush, a transmission bush inserted from the front side with respect to the transmission pins of the left link member and the right link member inserted in the slit of the slider and arranged between the transmission pin and the slit, and an extension piece of the left link member. An arc-shaped gear retainer that is arranged between the drive gear and the unit base 3505, and an ascending / descending position detection that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3505 and that can detect the slide position (elevating position) of the lower back decorative body 3501. Underside relay that is attached to the front surface of the sensor and the unit cover and relays the connection between the underside decorative substrate and the second drive substrate 3027. And it includes a plate, a.

  Although not shown, the left link member of the lower back production unit 3500 includes a detection piece that extends outward in the radial direction on the side opposite to the gear portion with respect to the rotation axis. By detecting with the up-and-down position detection sensor, the turning position of the left link member can be detected, and thus the up-and-down position of the lower back decoration 3501 can be detected.

  In the underside effect production unit 3500 of this embodiment, the underside decoration 3501 is positioned below the window 2501 in the center accessory 2500 when the underside decoration 3501 is located at the lower end with respect to the vertical slide end. It is located and is invisible from the player side (state at the retracted position) (see FIG. 110). On the other hand, when the lower back ornament 3501 is located at the upper end with respect to the vertical slide end, the lower back ornament 3501 is positioned in the upper window portion 2501 from the lower side of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is in a state that can be visually recognized from the player side (state of appearance position) (see FIG. 160). Note that, as shown in FIG. 160, the underside decoration 3306 of the underside effect unit 3300 and the underside decorative object 3501 of the underside effect unit 3500 have a lower end and an upper end respectively when they are in the appearance position. Are so close that they do not touch.

[2-9. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIGS. 114, 115, etc., the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. It is like this.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is designed to be inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and is projected from the left side in front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the right side of the back box 3010 in the rear view, and the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3040. By sliding the lock mechanism 3040 downward to close the insertion opening, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 161), and the like, and a peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower part of the. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Has become.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes an inverter board box 1920 that accommodates an inverter board 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight, on the rear view left side of the peripheral control board box 1910.

[2-10. Movable performance on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right middle effect unit of the center accessory in the front unit, and FIG. 158 (a) is a state in which the front right middle movable ornament of the front right middle effect unit is in the normal position. 3B is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above, and FIG. 6B is a perspective view seen from the front slightly above with the front right middle movable decorative body at the appearance position. Also, FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back horizontal production unit in the back unit, and FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the upper back production unit and the lower back production unit in the back unit. . As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, in the game board 4 of this example, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is like this.

  Further, in the game board 4, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 of the front right middle effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 has a window portion in a front view. It is located at the right end of 2501 and is in a state in which the outer circumference of the circular fixed decorative body 2620 in the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is surrounded by the front right middle outer circumference decoration member 2730 of the front right outer effect unit 2700. In this normal state, the fixed decorative body 2620 of the back right middle movable decorative body 2610 is entirely visible from the player side, whereas the rotating decorative body 2630 is visible from the player side except a part on the left side in front view. It is invisible.

  Furthermore, in a normal state, the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L of the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back decoration 3306 of the back rendering unit 3300, and the back decoration of the back rendering unit 3500. The bodies 3501 are located outside the window portion 2501 in the front view center accessory 2500, respectively, and are invisible from the player side.

  In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, from the normal state, according to the special lottery result which is drawn by the game balls being received in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the table right middle performance unit 2600, The back horizontal production unit 3100, the back production unit 3300, and the back production unit 3500 can be appropriately moved to perform a predetermined movable production.

  Specifically, for example, in the front right center effect unit 2600, the front first drive motor 2651 is rotationally driven to rotationally drive the annular rotary decorative body 2630 of the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 in a predetermined direction. be able to. At this time, as described above, since the rotating decorative body 2630 is in a state in which only a part of the left side in front view is visible from the player side, when the rotating decorative body 2630 rotates in this state, a circular fixed decoration is formed. It is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the left side of the body 2620 flows upward or downward according to the rotation direction.

  Also, in the front right middle rendering unit 2600, by rotating the front second drive motor 2671, the base member 2660 supporting the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 is centered on the bearing portion 2662 formed at the upper end thereof. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be rotated and can be rotated from a normal position, which is the rightmost position in a front view in a normal state, to an appearance position, which is located on the front center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 157). ). In the state of this appearance position, as shown in FIG. 157, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 has moved from the front right outer effect unit 2700 to the left side in the front view, and only a part of the left side in the front view from the player side. The rotating decoration body 2630 of the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 that cannot be visually recognized comes off from the rear side of the front right middle outer peripheral decoration member 2730, and most of them are visible to the player side.

  By pivotally moving the front right middle rendering unit 2600 to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 moves to a position closer to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the front middle movable decorative body 2610 from the player side. Can stand out. By rotating the rotary decoration body 2630 by driving the table first drive motor 2651 in a state in which the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 is moved to the appearance position, the front right middle movable decoration body 2610 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decoration body 2610 in the right of the front side.

  As shown in the figure, in the front right-center production unit 2600, in the appearance position, the guide piece 2664 extends to the upper right side of the front surface of the stage 2510. Even if the game ball bounces to the 2610 side, it can be bounced back to the stage 2510 side by the guide piece 2664.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 is arranged on the extension line on the right side of the first stage 2511 in front view in the stage 2510, and is formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. Since it is designed to be guided by the arc-shaped groove (space), the game ball that deviates to the right from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) is in the groove (space) that guides the guide piece 2664. Even if it is housed and held (see FIG. 158 (a)), the front right middle production unit 2600 (front right middle movable decoration body 2610) moves from the normal position to the appearance position to guide the housed and held game ball. The piece 2664 can be pushed to the left and returned to the stage 2510 side.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 can fly the game ball accommodated and held on the left end side to the stage 2510 side by the speed of moving the front right middle movable decorative body 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position. (See FIG. 158 (b)), so that it is possible to show the player a movement different from the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 within the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the movement of the game medium to the player. It is possible to suppress entertaining and deteriorating the interest.

  In the back horizontal production unit 3100 of the game board 4, by driving the back horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 and the back horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 in the back horizontal slide unit 3150, the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit. Each of the 3100L can be moved from a position invisible from the player side (retracted position) to a center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to a position visible from the player side (appearing position) ( See FIG. 159). When the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L are moved to the appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is changed by the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L in the horizontal direction. The width is narrowed vertically, and the rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged in three rows in the vertical direction are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen visible from the player side, which interests the player. Can be strongly attracted to the back right effect unit 3100R, the back left effect unit 3100L, and the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this Yokoura production unit 3100, three rotary ornaments 3126 supported respectively by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L are separately extended in the vertical direction by driving the back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123. It is possible to rotate around, and when each rotating decorative body 3126 of the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L is visible from the player side, by rotating them, rotation It is also possible to enjoy the movable effect by rotating the decorative body 3126.

  Specifically, for example, when the back right rendering unit 3100R or the back left rendering unit 3100L of the back horizontal rendering unit 3100 is moved to the appearance position, the back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123 drives the rotary ornament in the retracted position. 3126 is rotated so that the surface with the predetermined decoration faces the player side, and then is moved to the appearance position, and the rotation of the rotating decorative body 3126 is changed each time the appearance position is moved. The stop positions can be different. As a result, the decoration of the rotating decorative body 3126 changes every time the back right effect unit 3100R and the back left effect unit 3100L appear, and the player can be entertained by the difference in the appearing decoration.

  Alternatively, when the back right effect unit 3100R or the back left effect unit 3100L is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back decoration 3126 is rotated by each of the back lateral rotation drive motors 3123, and is moved to the appearance position. You can also As a result, a plurality of rotating decorations 3126 that roll like rollers on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 appear, and the player's interest is strongly focused on the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. Can be attracted.

  Furthermore, after the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are moved to the appearance position, the rotary decorative body 3126 may be rotated by each back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123. After the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are covered by the unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L, the rotating decorative body 3126 supported by the back right production unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L is rotated, whereby a game is played. The player can be surprised, and the player can be made to pay attention to the rotating decorative body 3126 and the like, and the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3126 can be enjoyed.

  In the back production unit 3300 of the game board 4, by driving the back driving motor 3302, the back decoration 3306 is slid downward in an arc shape from a retracted position invisible to the player. It can be moved to the appearance position where it can be visually recognized from the person side. In the state in which the back decoration 3306 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the approximate center of the fist in the back decoration 3306 imitating a fist is extremely close to the player side located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In this state, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, in the back side production unit 3500 of the game board 4, by driving the back side drive motor 3506, the back side decorative body 3501 is moved from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the upper side visible from the player side. It can be moved to the appearance position. In the state where the lower back decorative body 3501 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the liquid crystal display device 1900 extends upward from the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 at substantially the center in the horizontal direction. .

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the back production unit 3300 and the under production unit 3500 are both moved to the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the under decoration 3306 and the under decoration are shown. The upper end of the body 3501 and the upper end of the body 3501 are in a state of being close to each other, and the back upper decorative body 3306 imitating a fist performs a movable effect as if it hits the lower lower decorative body 3501 imitating a flame. You can do it.

  Although not shown in the figure, the game board 4 includes a movable effect by the front right middle effect unit 2600, a movable effect by the back horizontal effect unit 3100, or a movable effect by the back effect effect unit 3300 and the under effect effect unit 3500. It is possible to perform a movable effect in which the above are combined, and various more various movable effects are presented to the player so that the player does not get tired of it.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the drawing, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting opening sensor 3081 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2101, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2102. 2125 and the general winning a prize opening 2104, the detection signal from the general winning a prize sensor 3082 which detects the game ball which is received in 2201 is input respectively via the main control I / O port 4100b, the gate sensor 2126, the general winning a prize mouth Detection signals from the sensor 3082, the count sensor 2114, and the magnetic detection sensor 3080 attached to the back unit 3000 are input via the panel relay board 3025 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It is supposed to be.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start opening solenoid 2124 and the attacker 2124 via the panel relay board 3025. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2113, the first special symbol display device 1185, the second special symbol display device 1186, and the first special symbol through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3025, and the function display substrate 1191. It outputs a drive signal to the symbol memory display 1184, the second special symbol memory display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol memory display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, the gate sensor 2126, and the count sensor 2114. As the general winning opening sensor 3082, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and passes through the gate portion 2105 frequently, so the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2126 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3081, the second starting port sensor 2125, and the gate sensor 2126. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game balls frequently enter, so that the count sensor 2114 also frequently detects the game balls. Therefore, the count sensor 2114 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not occur frequently by the general winning opening sensor 3082. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3082.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information related to games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank. 720, the tank rail 731, and the ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor in which a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), and for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is inputted to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the board 880 and is inputted to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with an error LED. A signal for displaying on the display unit 4130 is output to the error LED display unit 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is issued for the payout control I / O port 4111b. It is transmitted in a serial manner to the main control board 4100 via, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED indicator 4130 is a segment indicator and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When It informs that the payout rotator 748 is difficult to rotate due to meshing with the ball near its entrance), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that "count switch error" (specifically, , That there is a problem in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, payout). It notifies that the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates "full tank" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR unconnected" (dispensing). control "Electrical connection has been cut off in any area from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number" 9 "is displayed, it means" in stock "(specifically, The number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display plate 365, the main side relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is issued to the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and also outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 161, the firing control unit 4120, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal. A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 1100 per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a through the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, which electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506, is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e is triggered by the input of the ball-sending reference pulse to supply a constant current to the ball-sending solenoid 585 through the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of the game ball, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing.

[3-3A. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port for outputting drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. To transmit to the drive board 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 A screen for transmitting the light emission data from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 or displaying on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. In addition to transmitting the control data (display command) shown from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is sent to the sound source IC 4140c. To output.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base board. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. is doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various performances can flow, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control") built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also has an external watchdog timer (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external"). WDT ”) is also provided, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port. ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the peripheral data MPU 4140a outputs to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command. , A plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command are used, and in this embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. Based on the LED lights of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the door frame 5 or the received blinking command on the game board side, a lighting signal or The blinking signal is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 2222, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130 and the like provided on the game board 4.

  The first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. It outputs to the dial drive motor 414 provided in the, the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3202, 3506, etc. provided in the game board 4.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is normally operating, or receives a signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or the operation unit 400 included in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is provided. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via the first drive board 3026 or the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and relays the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay. The body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the terminal board 882, or the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are played. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By transmitting an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal) to the bass speaker 821. , It is possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects).

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a character ROM 4150d for the character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various stored data is transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display device 1900. We are in control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c uses a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a method of outputting.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit in the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a position where they are arranged on the screen and in a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as "order of sprite superposition").

  The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six characters arranged horizontally 2 × long 3 can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction from left to right when viewed from the front. The sub-scanning is performed and the sub-scanning is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, one line worth of data is sequentially processed from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and when drawing data for the next line is similarly input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels for one line are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 162 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first performs various registers and main control as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. The data stored in the internal RAM 4100e is initialized. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress status of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control internal RAM 4100e. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). , Executes a recovery process for recovering the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is executed without executing the restoration process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the random number that is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol Variable random numbers used for lottery processing for a predetermined time (variation time) required for variable display control, and reach effect as game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to variable display of the special symbol are executed. Reach random number used for lottery process such as whether or not, the design random number provided for the lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (first symbol random number, A second symbol random number), a random number counter that holds random numbers such as a random number (ordinary random number) that is used in a lottery process for a win or loss that triggers the operation of the movable piece 2106, and the like. It is provided.

  Note that the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number regardless of whether the first start opening 2101 is a winning start or the second starting opening 2102 is a start winning. It may be possible to change the execution ratio of the reach effect by acquiring from a counter with a different range of random numbers for updating the reach random number, or as a reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number High expected production by providing a first reach determination table corresponding to the symbol and a second reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol and having a determination value different from that of the first reach determination table (for example, reach You may make it different the execution ratio of (production).

  In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (fluctuating random number) among these random numbers that is not related to winning or losing is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this manner, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS, for example.

  FIG. 162 (b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, detection signals from various sensors such as the gate sensor 2126, the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and the general winning opening sensor 3082 are detected. Is entered. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control internal RAM 4100e) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the same main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for a win or loss as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2106 as a process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2106 becomes higher when a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied after the end of the big hit game state. The lottery process is configured to be executed (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state, and this is a long time as the operation time when the movable piece 2106 operates. By setting to, a time saving state is realized in which it is easier to accept the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 than in the normal state (non-time saving state).

  Specifically, in the control of the time saving state (called time saving control), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to "255/255", and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is always "0.08 seconds". It becomes "5.5 seconds" when the movable piece 2106 is maintained in the open state (the retracted state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102) after the stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol. There is. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, the normal hit is always won, and the passed game ball passes through the first passage 2122a (a guide route that allows time to be gained due to the concave shape). By stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol in a time (0.08 seconds) shorter than the time required to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2106, the game ball that is the trigger for the normal winning is won. The second starting port 2102 can be directly received. The movable piece 2106 is maintained in the open state (the retracted state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2102) for "5.5 seconds", and then is closed (in the second starting port 2102). It operates so that the game ball is in a retreat state where it cannot be accepted.

  On the other hand, in the non-time saving control, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0%, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds) to make a second start. The game ball cannot be received in the mouth 2102. Even in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol may be set to 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is won. When it becomes, the movable piece 2106 of the second starting opening 2102 is retracted for a time shorter than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting opening 2102, and then is moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2102.

  That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the player hits the ball to the right, winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 is impossible, or the winning is achieved with an extremely low probability. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that a lot of game balls are won in the first starting port 2101 instead of the second starting port 2102, the game ball is shot (so-called "left"). It is considered to be advantageous for the player to hit ") even if the superiority or inferiority of the bonus at the time of the big hit between the first starting opening 2101 side and the second starting opening 2102 side is taken into consideration.

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2106 of the second starting opening 2102 is retracted for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). This facilitates winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the game ball is aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls are won in the second start port 2102, not in the first start port 2101, (so-called “right”). It is considered to be advantageous for the player to hit the ball.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state (time saving state) in which the so-called opening extension function operates is set to "255/255", but in the ordinary lottery, the probability of winning is higher than that of the ordinary loss. It is not always necessary to win the regular win at 100%, for example, by setting the probability that the regular win is easily obtained.

  Further, as the time saving control, control for increasing the winning probability of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol compared to the non-time saving state, control for reducing the time required for the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol than the non-time saving state, the movement of the second starting opening 2102 Control for extending the period for retracting the piece 2106 beyond the non-time saving state, control for increasing the number of times the movable piece 2106 of the second starting port 2102 is retracted over for the non-time saving state, first special symbol display 1185 and second Any one or any of the control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display 1186 (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900) than the non-time saving state. You may make it perform a combination (all may be sufficient).

  Moreover, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. Then, the command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 and the like. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command, which is also set in the predetermined area of the main control internal RAM 4100e in the normal symbol process process, to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer as the process of step S18.

  Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning opening sensor 3082, etc. as the processing of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when a game ball wins the first starting port 2101 and the first starting port sensor 3081 is turned on, “3 balls”, a gaming ball wins the second starting port 2102 and the second starting is performed. When the mouth sensor 2125 is in the ON state, "1 ball", when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 2103 and the count sensor 2114 is in the "14 ball", the gaming ball is winning in the general winning opening 2104, 2201. When the general winning opening sensor 3082 is turned on, the "10 balls" award balls are paid out to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of holdings as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting port sensor 3081 as shown in FIG. 163. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and this is included in the main control. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM 4100e is executed (step S32). Moreover, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2125 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control internal RAM 4100e is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S40a) is executed. In the jackpot control process, as shown in FIG. 169, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is “4R certainty variation big hit A”, “4R certainty variation big hit B”, and “4R certainty variation big hit B”. When it becomes a mode that suggests either "4R probability variation big hit C", after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103. The open / close pattern to be closed when detected by the count sensor 2114 is controlled to a 4R jackpot gaming state in which it is repeated four times (sometimes referred to as a 4R jackpot gaming state in which it is simply opened for a long time).

  Further, as will be described later, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode in which "16R certainty variation big hit A", "16R certainty variation big hit B", "16R certainty variation big hit C" are suggested. In case of winning, the special winning opening 2103 is opened (0.6 seconds, 1.2 seconds, or 1.8 seconds) in the effect operation mode only for the first round, and then for the second to 16th rounds thereafter. Is a 16R jackpot in which an open / close pattern is executed, which is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 2114 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2103. Control the game state.

  Further, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "4R normal big hit a", the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 After that, the opening / closing pattern to be closed after 4 seconds is controlled to a 4R jackpot gaming state (sometimes referred to as a 4R jackpot gaming state of simply opening for a short time).

  Also, as will be described later, the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is "4R certainty variation jackpot D", "4R certainty variation jackpot E", "4R regular jackpot b", "4R" When it becomes a mode that suggests "normal jackpot c", the special winning opening 2103 is opened (0.6 seconds or 1.2 seconds) in the effect operation mode only for the first round, and then the subsequent 2 In the 4th round, each is controlled to a 4R jackpot gaming state in which an opening / closing pattern of closing after each opening for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) is executed (sometimes referred to simply as a 4R jackpot gaming state of opening for a short time) To do.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving control is executed, the right hit is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (the right hit state), while when the time saving control is not executed, the left hit is performed. Is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (left-handed state). However, in the left-handed state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot gaming state of a maximum of four rounds long-time open ( Only about 500 game balls can be acquired). On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol depending on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102, there is a 75% probability (allocation rate of the winning species). The expected value of prize balls that can be won when the jackpot is won, such as the 16-round long-time open jackpot game state (approximately 1880 game balls can be won). Therefore, when the right-handed state is controlled to be transferred, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be obtained than when the left-handed state is controlled.

  Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such a big winning opening 2103 opening control, as shown in FIG. 169, a high probability depending on the jackpot winning type that triggered the jackpot game. Each set process of the flag, the hour / hour flag, and the hour / hour counter is executed. The high-probability flag is a flag that indicates a high-probability state, and is used in a big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 168 described later and is set until the next big-hit occurs (first shown in FIG. Special symbol stop process or second special symbol stop process not shown).

  The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 169, the time saving control (high probability time saving state, after completion of the jackpot gaming state). Big probability (4R probability variation big hit A, 4R probability variation big hit B, 4R probability variation big hit C, 4R probability variation big hit D, 4R probability variation big hit E, 16R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit B, 16R probability variation big hit C, 4R normal Big hit b, 4R probability variation big hit c) is set when ending the big hit game state, when the next big hit, the special special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 173 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown Is reset in, or is reset within the special symbol process processing when the upper limit of the number of time saving is reached (for example, the processing of step S105 (or, Immediately after the process (corresponding to step S105 on the special symbol side 2) is performed, it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached in the process (not shown) for determining whether or not the upper limit value of the time saving number has been reached. When it is reset).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S35), then as the processing of step S36, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is controlled is set. Determine whether. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S40b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. As will be described later, in the small hit control processing, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a specific opening time (0.6 seconds, 1.2 seconds, or 1.8) according to the type of the small hit obtained as a result of the lottery. (Seconds) is released. However, in the small hit control process (step S40b), unlike the big hit control process (step S40a), since the condition device is in the inactive state, such a big winning opening 2103 opening control is performed. Before and after each setting process such as the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving counter is not performed.

  Further, if the small hitting running flag is not set (NO in step S36), the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is "0". "(S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S38), the second special symbol reservation storage On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the area is not "0" (step S37), the lottery according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The second special symbol process process including the process is executed (step S39). That is, in this embodiment, as long as the game is performed so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol that is held (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), Regardless of the lottery pending status for the second special symbol, only the lottery for the second special random number is preferentially executed so as to be continuously performed without interruption.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3081 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2101, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control internal RAM 4100e, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" which is the (upper limit value) (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol (lottery for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to obtain the state of, the processing of the following steps S43 to S44 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM 4100e. Then, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S44, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 2125 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102, as shown in FIG. 165. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control internal RAM 4100e, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S52). In the processing of step S52, when it is determined that the number of the second special symbols to be held is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to obtain the state of, the following steps S53 to S54 are performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM 4100e. Then, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of the second special symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  A command to instruct the reserved number of the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) when the reserved number of the first special symbol changes based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2101 (first pending The number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, and when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 2102, the above storage processing (step In S20), a command for instructing the number of second special symbols to be reserved (second reserved number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and the random numbers used for the determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is read, and the first special symbol such as the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Normal processing (step S80)

  2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) )

  3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)

  4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)

  5. As the mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 162) to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, as the process of step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM 4100e. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is the same main control built-in RAM 4100e. Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control internal RAM 4100e. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2101. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are sequentially stored from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start winning prize to the second starting opening 2102. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Then, after that, as the process of step S105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the winning of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 169 (a). Select the big hit determination table (step S112), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S111), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 169 (a) (step S113), select The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing are compared (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 169 (a), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d, and when the gaming state has a low probability (low probability non-probability) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Big chance judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of time saving state and low probability time saving state, and jackpot at the time of high probability used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state) And a determination table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 327 types of the first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65209 types of the first special random numbers. The first special random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that the special random numbers are out of alignment (the big hit probability at the time of low probability; about “1 in 200.4”). ). Moreover, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process in this example, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number. Similarly to the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability that is referred to for comparison with, the 327 types of second special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 809 types of second special random numbers are the jackpots. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the small hitting determination value indicating that the player has won, and match the deviation determination value indicating that the 64400 second special random numbers are the above-mentioned defects (low. Probability of a big hit at the time of probability; about “1 / 200.4”).

  Further, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 330 types of first special random numbers match the big hit determination value, and 65206 types of first special random numbers are out-of-range determination values. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they coincide with each other (a big hit probability at the time of high probability; about "1/1986"). Moreover, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process in this example, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number. Similarly to the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with, 330 kinds of second special random numbers coincide with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit has been hit, and 809 kinds of second special random numbers have the small hit. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the small hit determination value indicating that the player has been won and the 64397 different second special random numbers match the deviation determination value that indicates the loss. Probability of jackpot at the time of probability; about "1/1986"). The jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number (with the same number of jackpot determination values The jackpot determination value may be different (the jackpot probability is the same).

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines as a big hit as a result of the comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S115). ), A big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S116), and the big hit determination process ends.

  When it is determined in step S115 that the big hit is lost, the read first special random number matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won, based on the selected big hit judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S117). However, as described above, in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, the first special random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; 0/65536), so in this step S117 It will be judged that it has not been won in the small hit (judgment judgment).

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol normal process (not shown) in the second special symbol process process (step S39), the second special random number that matches the small hit determination value can be read (small hit probability; “81 minutes 1 ”). Then, as a result, when it is determined that the small hit determination value is matched, a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (corresponding to step S118 in the second special symbol process processing). Processing), and the jackpot determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S117 that there is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. Reach determination table in the high probability time saving state used in the case of, and the reach determination table in the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state and low probability time saving state), Is equipped with. As will be described later, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state according to this embodiment, all 72 types of reach random numbers do not reach in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state. Is made to match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach determination value does not match the reach determination value that indicates to reach. However, even if the obtained reach random number matches the reach determination value, if the condition is that the reach effect is not controlled, it indicates that part of the reach random number is reached. You may make it respectively relate so that it may correspond with a reach determination value.

  Further, in the reach determination table at the time of the low probability state, the five types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach reaches, and the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination values indicating that the reach does not reach. Reach random numbers are associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is made higher than in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, a reach determination value indicating that 5 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the low probability state reach are provided. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match and reach the reach determination value indicating that 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is performed is the same as that in the low-probability non-time saving state in the high-probability non-time saving state.

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S102 (step S119), and determines that the reach loss occurs (YES in step S120), A reach flag indicating that the variation has a relatively long variation time for high-expectation performance is set, and the process ends (step S121).

  FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 170, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 169 (b), and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. The big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined by comparing with the symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 169 (b), in the symbol determination table on the side of the first special symbol, the symbol for the type of big hit (4R certainty variation big hit A, 4R certainty variation big hit B, 4R certainty variation big hit C, 4R normal big hit a) Random numbers (first symbol random numbers; 0 to 199) are stored in such a manner that they are associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), also in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, the type of big hit (16R sure change big hit A, 16R sure change big hit B, 16R sure change big hit C, 4R sure change big hit D, 4R sure change Big hit E, 4R normal big hit b, 4R normal big hit c) are stored in the form of being associated with symbol random numbers (second symbol random numbers; 0 to 199), respectively.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of big hit by identifying the type of big hit associated with the obtained symbol random number. As described above, in the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. More specifically, the probability variation jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state (allocation) are the same, but the first symbol random number The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the second symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on.

The specific game and effect contents for each type of jackpot are as follows.
1. At least in the non-time saving game state, after the big hit symbol combination appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the big winning opening 2103 has 9 gaming balls. By repeating the opening and closing pattern which is closed when the count sensor 2114 detects that the individual prize has been won, the game ball is controlled to the 4R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the special winning opening 2103. After the big hit game state, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shows that the high probability time saving state is controlled until the next big hit game state occurs, and that the high probability time saving state is advantageous from the beginning of the transition. 4R probability variation big hit A controlled by mode (battle mode)

  2. At least in the non-time saving game state, after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the big winning opening 2103 has 9 game balls. By repeating the opening and closing pattern that is closed when the count sensor 2114 detects that the individual prize has been won, the game ball can be entered into the special winning opening 2103 (easy) and is controlled to the 4R big hit game state. After the big hit game state, it is the same as 4R probability variation big hit A in that it controls to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, but in the high probability time saving state, first, the first time about the special symbol. Change (more accurately, the first change of either the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol), after performing the chance production described below, 4R probability variation big hit B that it is a state is controlled to the effect mode shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 (battle mode)

  3. At least in the non-time saving game state, after the big hit symbol combination appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the big winning opening 2103 has 9 game balls. By repeating the opening and closing pattern that is closed when the count sensor 2114 detects that the individual prize has been won, the game ball can be entered into the special winning opening 2103 (easy) and is controlled to the 4R big hit game state. After the big hit game state, the variation about the special symbol (more precisely, the variation of either the variation number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until once. , After this high-probability time-saving state is over, while controlling to a high-probability non-time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, it corresponds to the fluctuation time for one time about the special symbol That performs chance effect later in the high-probability time reduction state, 4R probability variation big hit C in high probability non-time reduction state controlled by the normal effect mode at the time of

  4. At least in the non-time saving game state, the open / close pattern for closing the special winning opening 2103 for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) without causing the big hit symbol combination to appear in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is 4 Repeatedly control the 4R jackpot gaming state, and after this 4R jackpot gaming state, control to a low probability non-time saving state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and also include the period of being controlled to the 4R jackpot gaming state. In the low probability non-time saving state, 4R normal big hit a is controlled so that the normal production mode appears.

  5. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. In the mode (here, short effect open (0.6 seconds)), the special effect result (winning image) appears in the 2nd to 16th rounds, respectively, and then open for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or when the count sensor 2114 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern is executed to allow the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103. (Easy) Control to 16R big hit game state, after this 16R big hit game state, control to high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and high accuracy 16R in the time-shortening conditions to be advantageous state from the transition initially controlled in the effect mode (battle mode) shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 probability variation jackpot A

  6. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. It is operated in the mode (here, medium production open (1.2 seconds)), and in the second to 16th rounds after the special production result (winning image) appears, each is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or when the count sensor 2114 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern is executed to allow the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103. (Easy) Control to 16R big hit game state, after this 16R big hit game state, control to high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and high accuracy 16R probability variation in the time-shortening conditions to be advantageous state from the transition initially controlled in the effect mode (battle mode) shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 jackpot B

  7. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. In the mode (here, long production open (1.8 seconds)), the special production result (winning image) appears in the 2nd to 16th rounds, and each is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5). Seconds) or when the count sensor 2114 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2103, the opening and closing pattern is executed to allow the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103. (Easy) Control to 16R big hit game state, after this 16R big hit game state, control to high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and high accuracy 16R in the time-shortening conditions to be advantageous state from the transition initially controlled in the effect mode (battle mode) shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 probability variation jackpot C

  8. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. It is operated in a mode (here, short performance open (0.6 seconds)), and in the second to fourth rounds after no special performance result appears, each is briefly opened (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed later is controlled to the 4R big hit game state, and after this 4R big hit game state, it is controlled to the high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, but in the high probability time saving state , First, only the first variation of the special symbol (more accurately, the first variation of either the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) the chance described later After the output, it is advantageous state is controlled in the effect mode (battle mode) shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 4R probability variation jackpot D

  9. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. It is operated in the mode (here, medium performance open (1.2 seconds)), and in the second to fourth rounds after no special performance result appears, each is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed later is controlled to the 4R big hit game state, and after this 4R big hit game state, it is controlled to the high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, but in the high probability time saving state , First, only the first variation of the special symbol (more accurately, the first variation of either the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) the chance described later After the exit, 4R probability variation it is advantageous state is controlled in the effect mode (battle mode) shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 jackpot E

  10. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. It is operated in a mode (here, short performance open (0.6 seconds)), and in the second to fourth rounds after no special performance result appears, each is briefly opened (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed later is controlled to the 4R big hit game state, after this 4R big hit game state, fluctuations about the special symbol (more accurately, the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed) (Variation of any of) is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until once, and after this low-probability time-saving state ends, control to a low-probability non-time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs. Rutotomoni, performs chance effect described later in a low probability time reduction state corresponding to one cycle of the variation time for special symbols, in low probability non time-shortening conditions are controlled in normal effect mode at the time of 4R normal big hit b

  11. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. It was operated in the mode (here, medium production open (1.2 seconds)), and in the second to fourth rounds after no special production result appeared, each was opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern to be closed later is controlled to a 4R big hit game state, and after this 4R big hit game state, fluctuations about the special symbol (more accurately, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and Control) to a low probability time saving state until once, and after this low probability time saving state ends, control to a low probability non-time saving state until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Rutotomoni, performs chance effect described later in a low probability time reduction state corresponding to one cycle of the variation time for special symbols, in low probability non time-shortening conditions are controlled in normal effect mode at the time of 4R normal big hit c

  As described above, the 16R certainty variation big hit A, the 16R certainty variation big hit B, and the 16R certainty variation big hit C differ from each other only in the effect operation mode of the first R, and are substantially equal in game value. Also, regarding the 4R certainty variation big hit D and the 4R certainty variation big hit E, only the effect operation mode of the first R is different, and the game values are substantially the same. Furthermore, regarding the 4R normal big hit b and the 4R normal big hit c, only the effect operation mode of the first R is different, and the game values are substantially the same. That is, as will be described later, these opening patterns of the first R are supposed to serve as usefulness of the high expected production itself after the end of the variation of the second special symbol and function as its production elements, whereby the time saving function operates. It is designed to improve the enjoyment of the game when it is in the game state.

  In the left hitting state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2301 and the movable piece 2106 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 does not occur, only the winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 2101 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 1185, and the big hits related to the first special symbol (4R probability variation big hit A, 4R probability variation big hit B, 4R probability variation big hit C, 4R normal big hit) a) will occur. Similarly, in the right-handed state, no game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 will occur, except for the case where there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186. Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits related to the second special symbol (16R sure change big hit A, 16R sure change big hit B, 16R sure change big hit C, 4R sure change big hit D, 4R sure change big hit E, 4R normal big hit b, 4R normal big hit c ) Will occur.

  In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the open / close pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated four times at most, and only about 500 gaming balls are paid out, In the big hit related to the second special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is operated in the production operation mode for one time at the maximum, and then the open / close pattern for opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 15 times, and approximately 1880 pieces. It is possible to pay out the game balls.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, if 4R certainty variation big hit A is decided, 4R certainty variation big hit A symbol is decided as a big hit symbol, and if 4R certainty variation big hit B is decided, 4R certainty variation big hit B is decided as 4R certainty variation big hit B When the symbol is determined and the 4R probability variation big hit C is determined, the 4R probability variation jackpot C symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 4R normal jackpot a is determined, the 4R normal jackpot a symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. Also, although not shown, if 16R probability variation big hit A is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, 16R probability variation big hit symbol A is determined as a big hit symbol, and if 16R probability variation jackpot B is determined, 16R as a big hit symbol Probably strange jackpot pattern B is decided, when 16R certainty variation jackpot C is decided, it is decided as 16R certainty variation jackpot symbol C as a big hit symbol, and when 4R certainty variation jackpot D is decided, it is decided as 4R certainty variation jackpot symbol D as a big hit symbol If 4R probability variation big hit E is decided, 4R probability variation big hit E symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and if 4R normal big hit b symbol is decided, 4R normal jackpot b symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, 4R normal jackpot c When it is decided to, it is decided to be a 4R normal big hit c design as a big hit design.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set in step S133. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S133 in the second special symbol process process (step S39), the symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in FIG. 179 is selected. , A mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the second special symbol by comparing the selected symbol determination table with the second symbol random number read in the process corresponding to step S102 in the second special symbol normal process (second special symbol The small hit symbol as the stop symbol) is determined (step S134).

  As shown in FIG. 179, in the symbol determination table at the time of small hit, the symbol random numbers (second symbol random numbers) are respectively associated with the types of small hits (small hit a, small hit b, small hit c). It is remembered in the form. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of the small hit by specifying the type of the small hit associated with the acquired symbol random number.

The specific game and effect contents for each type of small hit are as follows.
1. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. , A small hit a that causes the player to recognize that the game condition up to now is maintained after operating in the short effect opening (0.6 seconds) a

  2. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed, and the special winning opening 2103 is changed to the effect operation mode (here. , A small hit b that causes the player to recognize that the previous game conditions are maintained after the operation is performed with the medium effect open (1.2 seconds) b

  3. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a combination of symbols at the time of appearance appears and high expectation effect described later is executed. , Small hit c that causes the player to recognize that the game conditions up to now are maintained after operating in long play open (1.8 seconds)

  As described above, the small hit a, the small hit b, and the small hit c according to the present application mean that when the big hit is won as well as when the big hit is lost, after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished. In this way, the effect operation mode appears, whereby the operation itself (type of effect operation mode) at the special winning opening 2103 is an effect element as to whether or not a large number of prize balls can be acquired. I am able to function. For example, in the present embodiment, a high-performance setting described later is performed by the setting mode according to the effect operation mode during the big hit shown in FIG. 169 (c) and the setting mode according to the effect operation mode during the small hit shown in FIG. 179. The expectation (probability) that a large number of prize balls can be obtained is higher when the medium performance opening appears than the short performance opening while the expected performance is being performed. The expectation (probability) that a large number of prize balls can be obtained is higher when the long production opening appears than in the middle production opening.

  Although not shown, when a small hit a is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, a small hit a symbol is determined as a small hit symbol, and when a small hit b is determined, a small hit symbol is a small hit symbol. If it is decided to be a b symbol, and if it is decided to be a small hit c, it is decided to be a small hit c symbol as a small hit symbol.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S133, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines as a lost symbol as a mode at the time when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S136), and then shifts to step S137. To do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control substrate 4100, as the process of step S137, the lottery result (type of big hit, type of small hit, out of reach, out of reach) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (may be an instruction for the stop symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Then, after that, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends.

  By the way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command described later (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern is displayed. It is stopped and displayed in the order of the design → middle decoration design (the left, middle, and right decoration designs may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other in the same pattern)). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU4140a, in the non-time saving game state, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped, the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command. If you specify 4R probability variation big hit A among the big hits on the side, a big hit design combination by "3" or "7" design (of the left, middle and right decorative designs "0" to "9") , "3", or "7" 3 combinations of symbols will be arranged), and if 4R certainty variation jackpot B or 4R certainty variation jackpot C is specified among jackpots, other than "3" or "7" In the big hit design combination by the design of (the left, middle, and right decorative designs are "0" to "9" among the designs of "3" or a combination other than "7", which is a combination of three) Determined, 4R of big hits (At least one of the left, middle and right decorative symbol combination which is not the same as other symbols) specific symbol combination in the case of identifying a determined to.

  On the other hand, as will be described later, in a game state in which the time saving function operates (such as a high probability time saving state), when fluctuation control on the second special symbol side is performed, including a case where a big hit or a small hit is specified. , Regardless of the result of the lottery, a variation time (for example, 0.099 seconds) shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) is set. Then, when the big hit or the small hit is specified, by determining the symbol combination at the time of the chance (the combination in which the chance symbol appears), the production that should originally be performed during the change of the special symbol is thus the chance symbol. This is realized as a profitable effect using the period after the symbol is stopped by.

  According to such a beneficial effect, whether or not the big hit is won while maintaining the maximum digestive speed for the variation of the symbols in the game state where the time saving function operates (high probability time saving state etc.) In addition to being able to perform the high-expectation production, it is possible to obtain the desired production result while this high-expectation production is being performed, but the big hit game (the first few rounds (the first round here) )), Or a small hit game will at least have the real benefit of winning a prize ball. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game while improving the performance in the game state in which the time saving function operates (such as the high probability time saving state).

  In addition, when the outlier is specified, it is determined to be an outfall pattern (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative designs are different among the left, middle, and right decorative designs) without the reach, and the variation pattern command described later. When the variation time specified from (the end of the game effect) has elapsed, the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, in this embodiment, in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, the reach deviation is not specified by the processing on the second special symbol side.

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process is to be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the jackpot flag as shown in FIG. 171. If it is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the small hit flag. If is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit is selected (step S144), and if the reach flag is set (step S145), the variation pattern table at reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S146), and the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are selected. If none of the grayed not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process ends. Thereby, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 1185 only for the variation time thus determined, and the production control is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU4100a, the variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d.

  Further, as will be described later, the variation pattern table at the time of a small hit of this example is basically equivalent to step S144 in the second special symbol process process (step S39) in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.). As described above, the variation time of 0.099 seconds, which is shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, is set.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 kinds of fluctuation random numbers out of 241 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are set as the judgment value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 kinds of fluctuation random numbers are a big hit. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low expectations is to be executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers indicate that one of the super reach effects with high jackpot expectations is to be executed. It is set as the determination value (223 to 240). It should be noted that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of the big-hit game state, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game state when the super-reach effect is executed is higher. It is increasing. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the reach random number on the second special symbol side can be matched with the reach determination value in the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state), a small hit or a big hit As in the case where is obtained, there is a symbol variation of 0.099 seconds in which the reach effect is not performed.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of the deviation, which is provided in correspondence with the first special random number and the first symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The variation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of the deviation, which is provided in correspondence with the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time of 0.099 seconds as a time saving state. Can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state, and prompts the player to win the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 during the time saving state and the player starts the second. Time is secured for winning the game ball in the mouth 2102.

  In addition, according to the variation time at the time of losing such a second special symbol when in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 at 0.6 second intervals is started second. Even in a situation in which the mouth 2102 is continuously accepted, since the symbol variation is ended before the next game ball is entered, those game balls are not provided for the lottery process. It is possible to prevent the exhaustion of the exhaust gas.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 130 and FIG. 159, the game ball that has been hit to the right passes through a path (a guide passage member 2142 and the like) that has an interval for one game ball, and first, the gate portion 2105 (first The second unit 2120) is supplied to the area X directly above. Then, as described above, when the game ball is received from the area X to the gate portion 2105 (second unit 2120) when in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained. (The winning probability is 100%), and the movable piece 2106 of the second starting opening 2102 is maintained in a retracted state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation in which the second starting opening 2102 can be successively received one after another (a time saving state in which almost all of the game balls that have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received in the second starting opening 2102). If so, each time these gaming balls are accepted one after another, in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, there is a low jackpot probability of around "1/200", but the lottery on the second special symbol side one after another. The control that can be digested becomes feasible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), The game balls are often received in the second starting opening 2102 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in the present example, as described above, the variation pattern table of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 includes a short-time state (a high-probability time-saving, including a case of a big hit or a small hit). An extremely short 0.099 second is always set as the variation time of the status etc.). In other words, in this case, when the loss is obtained, the symbol variation will be ended only in the time (0.099 seconds) that is less than the interval between firing game balls (0.6 seconds), so the second starting opening Even when the game balls are continuously received in 2102, the timing of the reception comes after the symbol variation ends. As a result, even if the game balls shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds are received in the second starting opening 2102 one after another, those game balls are discharged without being used for the lottery process. Will be suppressed.

  However, as will be described later, in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, even in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), 4R certainty variation big hit B, 4R certainty variation big hit C, 4R certainty variation big hit D, and 4R normal When determining the first variation time for the special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state caused by one of the jackpots b, the special variation pattern table is selected. ing. In the determination process using this dedicated variation pattern table, the result of the lottery ( Regardless of the number of winnings and losses and the number of holdings, a fluctuation time (for example, 40 seconds) longer than the average value of fluctuation times determined when the low probability non-time saving state is set is always determined. The chance production, which will be described later, is performed using this long variation time.

  In addition, even in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), even if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than a specific value, in order to avoid the fluctuation of the first special symbol, relatively, A long fluctuation time is set.

  Further, in this embodiment, an obstacle nail (not shown) is provided as an adjusting member that is formed so as to contribute to the probability of accepting a game ball into the gate portion 2105 in the area X. The acceptance probability of the game ball hit to the right by the gate unit 2105 (second unit 2120) can be easily adjusted in a wide range including a value close to “100%”.

  FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 172, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S171. As the process of 1, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is decremented by 1. As a result, when the variation time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 (step S171), if the fluctuation time timer is not 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time to definitely stop the symbol), Every time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S171 and S172 are performed.

  FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 173, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S181. As the process, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1185, and the first special symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (so-called interval period) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, after operating the condition device, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set and the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and the above If the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S194). ), And ends this process. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S35, and the big hit game is executed in the big hit control process (step S40a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, types of big hits (4R sure change big hit A, 4R sure change big hit B, 4R sure change big hit C, 4R regular big hit a, 16R sure change big hit A, 16R sure change big hit B, 16R sure change big hit C, 4R sure change big hit D, 4R sure change Big hit E, 4R normal big hit b, 4R normal big hit c command) Big hit start command (4R sure change big hit A command, 4R sure change big hit B command, 4R sure change big hit C command, 4R normal big hit a command, 16R sure change big hit command, 4R Set probability variation big hit D command, 4R normal big hit b command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit game state according to the kind of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamps / LEDs and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S186 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S186), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (step S190). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S190), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S191), and the small hit game is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (so-called interval period) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S193), and the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When it is updated to (step S194), this processing ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined in the process of step S36 that the small hit execution flag is set, and in the small hit control process (step S40b) described above. The small hitting game state comes to be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag has been set (NO in step S190), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the big hit or the small hit as the loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S194), this process is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag have not been set (steps S35, S36), and a new game is made according to the state of suspension. The process related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) comes to be performed (steps S37 to S39).

  However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, with respect to the high-expectation effect (for example, a display effect using a specific character image) in the battle mode (high-probability time-saving state), as a result of the jackpot lottery, Only when one of the small hits is obtained, after the symbol is stopped for a relatively short fluctuation time, it is necessary to take a time longer than the fluctuation time. In addition, as such a high expectation effect, a plurality of types of effects having different jackpot expectations are prepared, and the special winning opening 2103 of the effect time is opened according to the type of the effects (big hit expectation degree). You may make it change the production time until it becomes. However, in this case, the effect lottery about the length of the interval period is performed in the process of step S188 or the process of step S192. Then, the time (length of the interval period) obtained as a result of this production lottery is set in the interval timer.

  Further, as will be described later, in such a high-expectation effect (for example, a display effect using a specific character image), the player is given an opportunity to acquire a small amount of game balls during the effect. As described above, the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is operated, and the operation itself of the special winning opening 2103 (opening / closing member 2107) is used as a production element for determining whether or not a large number of prize balls can be obtained. I am trying to make it work. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the battle mode (high-probability time saving state), the pattern fluctuations are quickly absorbed until either the big hit or the small hit is obtained. And, as a result, when either the big hit or the small hit is obtained, at least a part of the interval period after the stop of the special symbol and the subsequent gaming state (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state) By using the period, a high-anticipated production as to whether or not a big hit has been obtained (further, its winning type) is performed.

  It should be noted that the phrase "the player is given a chance to acquire a small amount of game balls" means that the player can only expect to pay out the prize balls to the extent that "high expected production itself is made useful". , It is not worth paying for the jackpot probability that is set relatively low. In other words, because it is a prize ball payout that can be awarded even when a big hit is lost (small win), it is possible to use the period after the symbols are stopped to make a profitable and highly expected production without waste. It is feasible.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process process (step S15).

  Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2105, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100, as the processing of step S802, first acquires a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and executes a gate section passing process such as storing it in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and based on the read out normal random number, a lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol is performed. A normal symbol normal process (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 1189 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 is stopped (step S805)
4. The variation display of the normal symbol is displayed so that the mode of the variation control stop of the ordinary symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display aspect of the variation control of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1189. Ordinary symbol stop process to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the movable piece 2106 retracts to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. Ordinary electric accessory release process that executes a process that enables control (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 162).

  FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the above-mentioned ordinary holding number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

  In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value thereof, in order to newly set the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols to the suspended state, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of the normal symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S812 to S814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, as the process of step S821, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S822, normally stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, general figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

  Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2105 are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2105, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols is held can be stored so that it can be specified, and the variable display control is released from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). .

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current game state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the time saving time universal figure determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and the current game state is the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S825), the non-time saving ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected ordinary figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process are compared (step S828).

  In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the ordinary figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is a short time (low probability short time state and high probability short time state), It is provided with a non-time saving universal figure hit determination table used when the game state is non-time saving (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). In the time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the general-purpose figure determination value indicating that the regular figure is won, The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, the game ball is always won and the movable piece 2106 retracts to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. It is possible to control.

  In addition, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may match the universal figure determination value indicating that the regular random number has been won. However, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-deviation determination value indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync. In this way, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, the movable piece 2106 moves backward to the second starting opening 2102 because the game ball is not won. It does not control the acceptance of the game ball. However, as described above, the normal symbol may be won even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win. When the movable piece 2106 of the second starting port 2102 is retracted for a time shorter than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2102, and then is advanced again to the second position. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball into the starting opening 2102.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected ordinary figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that it is an ordinary figure hit (step S829). ), After setting the universal symbol hit flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol (step S830), the regular symbol hit as the mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S831), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected universal symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, if it is determined that the symbol is out, fluctuation of the ordinary symbol The non-universal symbol is determined as the mode at the time of control stop (normal symbol stop symbol) (step S832). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

[5. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 177, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 mS, and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. While setting the flag T, the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the liquid crystal is received based on the change pattern command transmitted by being set in the change pattern setting process (step S149 of the first change pattern setting process, the second change pattern setting process). A control process related to the display device 1900 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3041 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 mS has elapsed since the 16 mS steady-state process was started (command of step S601. Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process is completed, the 16 mS steady process is executed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 mS steady process in the sub-main process.

  Hereinafter, the game processing when the game is progressed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized.

  One of the purposes of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is to increase the number of game balls that can be obtained in one big hit game more than ever (1880 pieces), There may be provided loop performance (16R probability variation jackpot distribution ratio: 75%) that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate that exceeds 50% of the jackpot game in which such a large amount of game balls can be paid out. . However, in this case, in a game state in which the game can be executed under conditions advantageous to the player, the payout performance that can be paid out per unit time becomes excessive, and this As a result, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may become too high, and the burden on the hall side may become excessive.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in the high probability time saving state, the second special symbol is made easier by making it easier to receive the game medium in the second starting opening 2102 than in the first starting opening 2101. While promoting the lottery process on the side, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state (less than twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state. However, the probability value (generally less than 1/100, etc.), which is generally considered to be a low probability, is adopted (excessive game suppressing means). More specifically, in the lottery process on the side of the first special symbol, even if the big hit is won, even though the expected value of less than 500 pieces is paid out, the low-probability state and the high-probability state In any of the above cases, only a low jackpot probability of about "1/200" that is unfit for paying out such a quantity is adopted. Also, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, in both the low probability state and the high probability state, the low jackpot probability that is the same as the first special symbol side (a low jackpot probability of around "1/200") ) Has been adopted. With such a configuration, loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate that exceeds 50% of the big hit game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out (16R probability variation big hit distribution rate: 75% ), It is possible to prevent the payout performance that can be paid out per unit time from becoming excessive.

  However, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state (less than twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state), and generally low. If the probability value (for example, less than one-hundredth) that is considered to be a probability is simply adopted, an excessive delay may occur in the game or the performance when in an advantageous game state, which causes the game. There is a concern that the interest will decline. However, in the conventional gaming machine, even when there is a period (time saving state) in which the control for facilitating acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening is executed (time saving state), identification is made every time the game ball enters the starting opening. In many cases, the probability of entering the starting opening was not set so high in order to prevent the payout of prize balls from becoming too large. That is, in this case, in the case where the jackpot probability is set to the same low probability value in the low-probability state and the high-probability state, it is not possible to sufficiently increase the game speed in the high-probability time-saving state. Then, it is difficult to suppress the occurrence of an excessive delay in the game or the effect when in the advantageous game state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, at the time when any one of the game balls that was hit in the game area 1100 but was not accepted by the second starting opening 2102 occurs, the game is played. The payout of the specific prize ball each time the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 is set to “1” so that the total amount of the specific prize balls does not exceed the total amount of the game balls hit in the area 1100. Suppression control is to be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the total amount of the starting prize balls to be paid out each time the second starting opening 2102 is received (to the second starting opening 2102). No matter how high the probability of entering a game ball, the player's possession ball will not increase by paying out in accordance with the entered ball). Therefore, even in a time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state, etc.), it is possible to increase the probability of accepting a game ball into the second starting opening 2102 without considering such a balance with a specific prize ball. become. And due to such a high acceptance probability, in a short time state (such as a high probability time reduction state), the game balls are often accepted one after another in succession, which makes the game speed faster (change time more Short).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to achieve a dramatic improvement in the probability of accepting a game ball into the second starting opening 2102 when in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), The second starting port 2102 is arranged in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 and FIG. 159, when the game balls are continuously driven into the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100, all of those game balls are taken. , A flow-down structure in which the resin is molded so as to flow down while maintaining a mutual firing interval (0.6 seconds) and is sequentially guided to the second unit 2120 through the guide passage member 2142 (continuous). Acceptance promotion means).

  That is, in the second unit 2120 according to this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 in the unit 2120 can be won by moving the movable piece 2106 according to the passage. 2102 has the following features so that it is possible to win the prize through the first passage 2122a and the recess 2121b (passage from the gate portion 2105 to the second starting opening 2102) integrally formed in the unit 2120. It has been done.

  First, when the gate sensor 2126 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 161) acquires an ordinary random number based on the information indicating that the detection has occurred. , It is determined whether or not the normal hit is obtained based on the ordinary random number thus obtained (normal determination). Further, the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 161) variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 for a predetermined time based on the result of the normal determination. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the normal hit is obtained in the normal determination (when a specific stop display mode appears as a result of the normal display being variably displayed for a predetermined time), the main control board 4100 (FIG. 161) (See) controls the movable piece 2106 to be in the open state.

  In this regard, the guide passage having a predetermined length in the second unit 2120 requires a substantially uniform time for the game ball passing through the gate portion 2105 due to the structure integrally formed in the unit 2120. In this way, it is always guided to a region (the movable region of the movable piece 2106) that can be received by the second starting port 2102. On the other hand, in the time saving state (a game state in which the so-called opening extension function operates), until the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 reaches the second starting opening 2102 (while a substantially uniform time elapses). The main control board 4100 (see FIG. 161) executes the above-described normal determination, normal symbol variation display, drive control for opening the movable piece 2106, and the like so that a normal hit is obtained. The game ball itself that has passed through 2105 can be received in the second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to the present embodiment, in the time-saving state, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is always "0.08 seconds", and the symbol of the ordinary symbol is confirmed and displayed. The time from when the movable piece 2106 is opened to the open state is "0.008 seconds", and the time when the movable piece 2106 is maintained in the open state is "5.5 seconds". The time (interval time) from when the movable piece 2106 is changed from the open state to the closed state until the next variation symbol start (detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2126) is allowed is "0.05 seconds". ing.

  On the other hand, the second unit 2120 according to the present embodiment, the time from the game ball passing through the gate portion 2105 (normal pattern) (starting fluctuation) to the movable piece 2106 being in the open state "0. It takes only 088 seconds ”(or a time“ 0.1 seconds ”obtained by adding a slight margin time (for example,“ 12 ms ”)) to reach the second starting port 2102. More specifically, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 is meandered (decelerated while gaining a distance) by a concave portion 2121b (guide path) that is curved backward and reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2106. By so doing, such a time is secured while the size of the unit 2120 is reduced.

  As a result, when the winning is obtained in the ordinary lottery in the time saving state, the gaming ball itself which is the cause of the winning by passing through the gate portion 2105 is guided in the second unit 2120. Through the path (the first passage 2122a, the concave portion 2121b), the movable piece 2106 can be received from the movable region which is in the open state to the second starting port 2102. Then, since such an open state is continued for a long time of "5.5 seconds", a game ball is 0.6 seconds in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. When the game balls are launched at intervals (100 game balls are sequentially launched at a constant interval per minute), those game balls are delivered to the second starting opening 2102 via the guide passage member 2142 and the second unit 2120. It can be accepted one after another with the firing interval (0.6 second interval) unchanged.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to the present embodiment, in the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state), the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance into the second starting opening 2102. If the misalignment is obtained at, the symbol control period until the next variable display control of the second special symbol that has been held is started (addition time of the symbol variation time and the symbol stop time) By setting as follows, even in a situation where the game balls that are launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds are sequentially received in the second starting opening 2102, those game balls are not provided for the lottery process. We are trying to control what is discharged.

(B) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the state of suspension (the number of second special symbol suspension) is "1", the suspension is released ( As a result of lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "0"), if a loss is obtained, four game balls are started as the second variation time. “2.4 seconds” is set so that it can be accepted by the mouth 2102, and “0.1 seconds” is set as the stop time of the symbol thereafter (time to be fixedly stopped).
(B) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the state of suspension (the number of second special symbol suspension) is "2", the suspension is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol being performed based on the fact that the number held at this point is "1"), if a loss is obtained, three game balls are started as the second variation time. "1.8 seconds" is set as much as can be accepted by the mouth 2102, and "0.2 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbols.
(C) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the state of suspension (the number of second special symbol suspension) is "3", the suspension is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol being performed based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "2"), if a loss is obtained, as a variable time, when adding to the symbol stop time, "0.101 seconds" is set so that the two game balls can be received in the second starting port 2102, and "0.5 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbols.
(D) When the number of the variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that has been held (the number of second special symbol held) is "4", the hold is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol being performed based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "3"), if a loss is obtained, it is launched at an interval of 0.6 seconds as a variable time. Even when the next game ball is continuously received in the second starting opening 2102, "0.099 seconds" is set so that the timing of this reception can be made to come after the symbol variation ends. At the same time, "0.5 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbols (sequential lottery digestion control means).

  That is, according to such a configuration, when the loss is obtained when the number of second special symbols reserved is "1", "2", in order to make the number of second special symbols reserved maximum At least the time required for is set as the variable time (configuration (a), (b)). Therefore, while the second special symbol is fluctuating, as many game balls as necessary to maximize the number of holdings will be accepted, which basically makes the number of holdings maximum. Will be able to be played.

  On the other hand, if a loss is obtained when the number of second special symbols reserved is "3", "4", the next symbol variation that is in the state of suspension by the game suspension means is started. Until (until the hold is released) to the symbol control period (0.601 seconds, 0.599 seconds), in the symbol control period, a relatively short time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) The variable state is terminated by the control, and the control is performed so that the symbol display is maintained in the stopped state at the time of losing for a relatively long time (0.5 seconds) thereafter (configuration (c), (d). )).

  In particular, according to the above configuration (d), when a loss is obtained as a result of the lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102, the interval between the game balls is set to 0.6. Since the symbol variation is completed only in the time less than second, even when the next game ball launched at an interval of 0.6 seconds is continuously received in the second starting opening 2102, the timing of this reception is It comes after the fluctuation of the design is over. That is, in this case, in the high probability time saving state in which the game balls can be successively received in the second starting port 2102, each time the game balls are received, the probability of low jackpot is as low as in the low probability state. However, the lottery on the side of the second special symbol can be exhausted one after another. As a result, in the high-probability time saving state, a certain long time will be digested by a good tempo game using a game ball that is launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds and pattern fluctuations (production etc.), As a result, a loop performance (16R probability variation jackpot distribution ratio: 75%) that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate exceeding 50% of the jackpot game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out is provided. Even in this case, the entertainment level will be maintained at an appropriate level.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to a low probability value of the same degree in the low probability state and the high probability state, and therefore, the number of shortening times is only “one time”. The 4R probability variation big hit C will function as a so-called latency probability variation, but it is practically only worth the same gaming state as the low probability non-time saving state (normal gaming state). Therefore, in the normal game state, the substantial rush rate that is advantageous for the player is 38.5% calculated from the total value of the allocations to the 4R certainty variation jackpots A and B. On the other hand, the probability that the advantageous state is continued for the player (continuation rate) is 77% calculated from the total value of the allocations to the 16R probability variation big hits A to C and the 4R probability variation big hits D and E, Although the probability of occurrence of probability fluctuation is the same, the continuation rate to the player-favorable state is higher than the rush rate to the player-friendly state.

  In addition, in such a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), in the case of symbol control at the time of loss (the number of second special symbols to be reserved is "3", "4"), in the symbol control period, relatively. While ending the variable state in a short time, for a relatively long time after this, the symbol display is maintained in the stopped state at the time of losing (the fixed stop time is longer than the variable time of the symbol). In this way, the symbol display is maintained for a long time in the stopped state at the time of losing even though it is in the symbol control period, and the lost symbol is as if waiting for the acceptance of a new game ball. It often happens that a game ball is accepted when in a stopped state. Therefore, even when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 when the number of holdings is maximum (when the game ball is discharged without being used in the lottery process), It becomes possible to make the game balls appear to be used in the lottery process.

  In particular, in the symbol control at the time of losing in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) (the number of second special symbols held is "3", "4"), the interval between firing game balls (0.6 seconds) By ending the symbol fluctuation in less than time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) only, in the case where the next game ball launched at an interval of 0.6 seconds is continuously accepted in the second starting opening 2102. Even if there is, the timing of acceptance is set to come after the pattern change ends. Therefore, even when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 when the number of holdings is maximum (when the game ball is discharged without being used in the lottery process), It becomes possible to make the game balls appear to be used in the lottery process.

  By the way, even in such a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), it is important to execute a high expectation effect (reach effect etc.) at a predetermined frequency in order to maintain amusement of the game. However, since such a high expected performance requires a relatively long fluctuation time, this is a predetermined probability (for example, when the reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach). By doing so, even if the variation frequency of the symbols in the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state) is maximized as described above, in the end, the appearance of the high expectation effect that requires a relatively long variation time Due to this, the average speed required for digesting each pattern fluctuation becomes slow. Not only that, but when high expectations are made when the game is lost (when the big hit is lost), not only does it slow down the average speed required to absorb the fluctuations in the design, but it also creates no gaming value. Only a lost pattern appears, and there is a concern that such a useless effect may deteriorate the interest of the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the battle mode (high-probability time saving state) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is comparatively long without slowing down the fluctuation of the symbols. The control is performed so that a high-expectation effect requiring a variable time can be executed with a predetermined probability. Furthermore, even if the high-expectation effect at the time of losing is performed, control is performed to make the high-expectation effect itself useful so as not to be a wasteful effect.

  More specifically, when the fluctuation control of the second special symbol side is performed under specific conditions (battle mode), when a big hit or a small hit (special loss) is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery As long as it is, the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs control so that any of a plurality of types of high-expectations with different expectations can be executed. However, the variation of the second special symbol itself, while starting to leave which of the multiple types of high-expectations to appear, in an undecided state, and to perform control to end this relatively early ing.

  That is, first, the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit (special loss) is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, a symbol combination at the time of opportunity (the liquid crystal display device 1900 The combination in which the symbol appears) is determined as the stopped symbol (FIG. 170; step S132, step S134). In addition, when a pure loss in which neither the big hit nor the small hit (special loss) is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the symbol combination at the time of the loss is determined as the stop symbol (FIG. 170). ; Step S136).

  Further, as described above, the main control MPU 4100a, regardless of the result of the big hit lottery (winning, its winning type, etc.), when the second special symbol changes under specific conditions (game state, holding status, etc.). Instead, a variation time (for example, 0.099 seconds) shorter than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds) is set (FIG. 171, step S142, step S144, step S146, step S147).

  When these processes are performed, the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, even if one of the big hit and the small hit (special loss) is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, plural types Which of the character effects (highly expected effects) to appear is left undecided, and the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 1186 has the short variation time (for example, 0.099 seconds). The control is performed to vary only (FIG. 171; step S149). At this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a also causes any of a plurality of types of character effects (high expected effects) with different expectations to appear the big hit image based on the command (steps S137 and S149) from the main control MPU 4100a side. Whether the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed by the above-mentioned short change time (for example, 0.099 seconds) is controlled while the state of whether or not to be determined is left undetermined.

  As a result of the big hit lottery, when neither big hit nor small hit (special loss) is obtained (when pure loss is obtained), the special symbol in the second special symbol display device 1186 is set as described above. When the display is stopped by changing for a short change time (for example, 0.099 seconds), it is controlled to a change waiting state for the next special symbol (FIG. 173; step S194).

  Then, as a result of such control, if the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 is stopped by the symbol combination at the time of occurrence when a relatively short variation time has passed (in the liquid crystal display device 1900, When the decoration pattern is stopped as a combination of chance patterns appearing), the main control MPU 4100a operates the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 according to the big hit or the small hit obtained as a result of the big hit lottery. The length of the interval period until the start is set (FIG. 173; step S188).

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has obtained from the main control MPU 4100a information regarding the type of big hit or the type of small hit obtained as a result of the big hit lottery (FIG. 173; step S187, step S191), and based on this information. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 1900 determines which of a plurality of types of high-expectations with different expectations is to be performed. Then, as will be described later, the high-expected performance of the type thus determined is extended from the interval period controlled by the main control MPU 4100a to at least a part of the subsequent gaming state (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state). The liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to appear.

  Here, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment sets a predetermined fixed value (for example, about 12 seconds) for the length of the interval period regardless of the type of big hit or the type of small hit. I am going to do it. However, the length may be set separately for each of the symbol random numbers that determine the type of big hit or the type of small hit, and the interval period having the set length may be set. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to have different effect times for a plurality of types of high-expectation effects, and it is possible to realize more diverse effects even though it is effects in the interval period after the symbol is stopped. Become.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a operates the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 in an opening manner according to the winning type of the big hit or the small hit obtained as a result of the big hit lottery when the set interval period elapses. Control. That is, in this case, when a high-expectation effect is performed under a specific game condition, even if a big hit is not obtained as a result of the effect, at least an opportunity for winning a prize ball is being performed. Will be granted. Therefore, the real benefit of winning a prize ball is provided as much as the high-expectation production is performed, and while maintaining the amusement of the game while aiming to improve the production performance in the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state). Will be able to.

  However, even when the control for making the high-expectation production itself useful (control for giving an opportunity to win a prize ball while the high-expectation production is being performed) is performed, the production is still performed. Of these, the opening time may have to be set relatively short, and there is a concern that the player may proceed without being aware that the special winning opening 2103 is open. . That is, in this case, it can be said that the game ball is naturally won in the special winning opening 2103 only by performing the right hitting game in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.). However, if it is not possible to realize that such a privilege is given, there is a concern that the interest in the game in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) may be reduced.

  Therefore, the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, as described above, the first special opening pattern of the big hit game on the second special symbol side and the open pattern of the small hit game are both of the second special symbol. Highly anticipated production after the end of fluctuation Not only is it useful, but it also functions as a production element. As a result, it is possible to urge the liquid crystal display device 1900 to gaze at the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 even during a period in which a high-anticipation effect that tends to deprive the gaze is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the high-expectation production while having the feeling that the high-expectation production itself has been made profitable by giving the opportunity of winning a prize ball, and when the player loses (the big hit fails to win). It is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the high expectation effect is performed.

  That is, the small hit a, the small hit b, and the small hit c are prepared so as to be able to execute a high-expected production at the time of losing (when the big hit is lost) after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished. As shown in FIG. 169 (c) and FIG. 179, the small hitting open pattern and the large hitting open pattern are associated with each other as follows.

・ Open pattern of small hit game when small hit a is obtained, open pattern of one round of big hit game when 16R certainty variation big hit A is obtained, 4 big opening game of big hit game when certain variation big hit D is obtained The opening pattern at the time of 1 round and the opening pattern at the time of 1 round of the big hit game when the 4R normal big hit b is obtained are the short effect opening in which the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is opened for 0.6 seconds. Respectively executed as.

・ Open pattern of the small hit game when the small hit b is obtained, the open pattern of one round of the big hit game when the 16R sure change big hit B is obtained, and the big hit game when the 4R sure change big hit E is obtained The opening pattern at the time of 1 round and the opening pattern at the time of 1 round of the big hit game when the 4R normal big hit c is obtained are the medium performance opening in which the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is opened for 1.2 seconds. Respectively executed as.

The opening pattern of the small hit game when the small hit c is obtained, and the opening pattern of one round of the big hit game when the 16R probability variation big hit C is obtained, the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is 1.8. It is executed as a long production opening that opens for only two seconds.

  According to the setting method according to the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103, when the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 performs the opening operation by the long production opening (1.8 seconds), the 16R probability variation big hit C One of the small hits c is won. That is, in this case, it is possible to understand that at least the high-probability time-saving state will not be terminated, and it will function as an effect element that can entertain the subsequent high-expectation effect.

  Moreover, in the symbol determination table (FIG. 169 (c)) at the time of a big hit on the second special symbol side according to this embodiment, and the symbol determination table (FIG. 179) at the time of a small hit, rather than the short effect opening. When the performance release appears, the expectation that the result will be more advantageous to the player (here, the probability that a large number of prize balls can be obtained) is higher, and the long performance release appears than the medium performance release. The allocation mode of the second symbol random number (0 to 999) for each winning type is set so that the same degree of expectation is higher at that time.

  That is, in this case, a high expectation effect on whether or not a big hit is obtained depending on the type of the game content which becomes clear as the game (the opening operation at the special winning opening 2103) controlled by the main control MPU 4100a side progresses. The expectation level of will be gradually shown. In this way, not only the display control on the peripheral control MPU4140a side, but also the game content (a mode of the opening operation at the special winning opening 2103) by the control on the main control MPU4100a side is itself a production element indicating the degree of expectation of high-expected performance As a result, it is possible to develop the same effect while providing an advantageous game (opportunity for winning a prize ball) according to the degree of expectation of the high expected effect.

  Next, the control on the main control MPU 4100a side and the control on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side when a big hit or a small hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode) will be described in more detail.

  Here, FIG. 180 is a time chart showing an example of the control on the main control MPU 4100a side and the control on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side when the big hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode). FIG. 181 shows the control on the side of the main control MPU 4100a and the control on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4140a when a big hit is lost (missed) under a specific condition (battle mode). It is a time chart which shows an example.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), the right-handed game in which the game balls are successively launched with a launch intensity of a predetermined value or more in the battle mode (high-probability time saving state, etc.) is continuing, and 0 It is assumed that the game balls launched at intervals of 6 seconds are successively accepted by the second starting opening 2102. Then, at the timing t1, if the number of reserved second special symbols becomes "4", which is the maximum number, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), the main control MPU 4100a, those game balls are the second start opening. Each time it is accepted by 2102, the control for rapidly extinguishing the lottery for the big hit (the lottery for the second special symbol side) one after another (for example, the control regarding the setting of the variation time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball) will be performed. .

  As a result of repeating such a game, if it is determined that the big hit is won at the timing t2, the main control MPU 4100a causes the variation in the delay (timing) until the big hit is won. Like the symbol variation between t1 and t2), the symbol variation ends with a shortened variation (a shorter variation than the normal variation (loss variation) when the number of second special symbols held is small) that is not even the so-called reach effect. Control.

  Note that, while the control for performing such high-speed digestion is being performed on the main control MPU 4100a side, the peripheral control MPU 4140a should also be adjusted to the control on the main control MPU 4100a side as shown in FIG. 180 (d). Then, the control for effecting the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the shortening variation is repeatedly executed. However, when a big hit or a small hit (special loss) is specified, the combination in which the chance symbol appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped and displayed.

  As a result, at the timing t3 when the symbol variation at the time of big hit is stopped and displayed in the chance symbol, the time previously associated with the symbol random number (second symbol random number) that determines the type of big hit is the special winning opening. Control is performed to set as an interval period until the opening operation in 2103 is started. In addition, at this timing t3, the condition device operates and the high probability flag and the time saving flag are reset. Therefore, in the period after the timing t3, the game ball is difficult to be received in the second starting opening 2102 (non-time saving game state).

  Here, in the case of this embodiment, a fixed time (6 seconds) is set as the interval period regardless of the type of big hit or the type (expected degree) of high-anticipated performance. Then, as will be described later, during the period, specific effect contents such that the gaze by the player is shifted to the special winning opening 2103 side.

  At timing t4 when the interval period ends, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), the opening mode of the first round (short effect opening, medium effect opening, long effect opening) is set based on the jackpot type. At the same time, control for operating the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is started so that the set opening mode appears. That is, as described above, by giving the opportunity of winning a prize ball while the high-expectation effect is being performed by such control, and confirming the opening mode (short effect opening, middle effect opening, long effect opening), It is possible to know the degree of expectation (probability) for the appearance of a special effect result (here, an effect result indicating that a large number of prize balls can be obtained) in the high-expectation effect. In addition, by urging the player to pay attention to the movement itself of the special winning opening 2103 as a production element in this manner, the player feels that the high-expectation production itself has been made beneficial by giving the opportunity of winning a prize ball. This makes it possible to enjoy the high-expectation effect, which in turn suppresses a decrease in the entertainment level of the game when the high-expectation effect at the time of loss is performed.

  Then, when a specific opening mode (short effect opening, medium effect opening, long effect opening) appears in the special winning opening 2103 and the timing t5 at which the opening of the first round of the big hit game ends, at the second and subsequent rounds of the big hit game. Control to set the time between rounds until the start. For the time between the rounds, for example, a time associated in advance according to the type of big hit is set. However, in this embodiment, a specific time (for example, 12 seconds) is set regardless of any winning type.

  That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, from the timing when the interval period is started (the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed) t3, the opening period of the special winning opening 2103 (the first round in the big hit game) Including the operation period), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled so that a high-expectation effect appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 until the timing t6 when the set time between rounds ends. Then, after the expectation degree is indicated by the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103, an effect display by a specific character as to whether or not a special effect result appears within the time between the rounds (for example, 12 seconds) is displayed. I'm trying to appear.

  Here, if any of 16R certainty variation big hit A, 16R certainty variation big hit B, and 16R certainty variation big hit C is won, a special effect result appears within the time between the rounds. In this case, after the timing t6 when the time between the rounds ends, during the big hit game of 2 to 16 rounds, it is possible to grasp that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if any of the 4R probability variation big hit D, 4R probability variation big hit E, 4R regular big hit b, and 4R regular big hit c is won, no special effect result appears within the time between the rounds. . That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the game under specific conditions (battle mode) will be completed over a period until the jackpot game of 2 to 4 rounds by opening for a short time is completed. There will be an effect that indicates that there is.

  However, a special effect result may appear even if any of the 4R probability variation big hit D, the 4R probability variation big hit E, the 4R normal bonus hit b, and the 4R regular bonus hit c is won. That is, in this case, as the big hit game effect (within the time after the second round) while the fact that the big hit has been confirmed is confirmed, the effect indicating the winning type is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181, even when the small hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode), basically, the same movement as when the big hit is won appears. Has become.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), at timing t21, if it is determined that the big hit is lost, but the small hit (special loss) is won, the main control MPU 4100a is judged. In spite of the fact that the small hit has been won, similar to the loss variation so far (the symbol variation between the timings t1 and t21), the shortened variation (the number of second special symbols to be reserved is not even reached). The control for ending the symbol variation is performed in a time shorter than the normal variation (loss variation) when the number is small.

  As a result, at the timing t31 when the symbol variation at the time of small hit is stopped and displayed in the chance symbol, the time previously associated with the symbol random number (second symbol random number) that determines the type of small hit is large. Control is performed to set the interval period until the opening operation of the winning opening 2103 is started. In the case of a small hit, the condition device does not operate, and the high probability flag and the time saving flag are not reset. Therefore, even in the period after the timing t31, the game ball is still easily accepted in the second starting opening 2102. (See FIG. 181 (a)). As described above, not only the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also the movement at the special winning opening 2103 and the movement of the game ball with respect to the second starting opening 2102 can be used as an effect element for the big hit lottery. By doing so, the hint of the effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is hidden in the event appearing as a result of the control by the main control MPU 4100a, and the game enjoyment can be improved by such an innovative effect.

  However, for the interval period at the time of small hit, for example, the same time (6 seconds) as that at the time of large hit described above is set regardless of the type of small hit or the type (expected degree) of high-expected performance. Also, similarly, during this period, specific effect contents such that the player's gaze is moved to the special winning opening 2103 side appear.

  At the timing t41 when the interval period ends, as shown in FIG. 181 (c), the opening mode (short effect opening, medium effect opening, long effect opening) is set based on the type of small hit, and Control for operating the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is started so that the set opening mode appears. In addition, when the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is operated, the big winning opening has a positional relationship such that the game balls hit to the right in the big winning opening 2103 are successively won instead of the second starting opening 2102. It is desirable to arrange the 2103 and the second starting port 2102 respectively.

  Then, a specific opening mode (short effect opening, medium effect opening, long effect opening) appears in the special winning opening 2103, and at the timing t51 at which the opening in the small hit game ends, the next special symbol starts changing. Control is performed to set the waiting time after opening the small hits (interval after opening) until the permissible. As for the standby time after opening the small hit, for example, a time associated in advance according to the type of the small hit is set. However, in this embodiment, a specific time (for example, 12 seconds) is set for any type, as in the case of winning the big hit.

  That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, from the timing (timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed) t31 at which the interval period at the time of small hit is started, the opening period (small hit) of the special winning opening 2103. Including the (operation period of time), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to exhibit a high expectation effect until the timing t61 at which the standby time after opening the small hit ends as described above. Then, according to a specific character as to whether or not a special effect result appears within the waiting time (for example, 12 seconds) after opening the small hit after the expectation degree is indicated by the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103. The production display appears.

  However, here, no matter what kind of small hit, a special effect result does not appear within the waiting time after opening the small hit. In addition, since the condition device does not operate, the effect that the game under a specific condition (battle mode) may end is not performed.

  In other words, when a small hit is obtained, no matter which kind is obtained, as a result of the high expected effect, an effect that shows that the big hit is lost (is lost) appears. Becomes In this sense, if a big hit or a small hit is obtained and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a combination in which the chance design appears, the decorative design may be changed again and the production may be advanced. . That is, in this case, after the special winning opening 2103 operates in any of the effect opening modes, the decorative symbol is stopped again while any of the effect images EG14a to EG14c shown in FIG. 187 appears. The stop display mode at this time shows the effect result of the high expectation effect.

  Here, in the variation of the second special symbol in the battle mode (high-probability time saving state), as described above, the effect accompanied by the reach is not performed. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102, basically, the second special symbol and the decorative symbol are immediately, regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol, a lost symbol (pure lost) or a chance symbol ( A big hit or a small hit is displayed.

  An example of the effect contents of the high expected effect when the big hit or the small hit is won under the specific condition (battle mode) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 182 to 187.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 182, when it is determined that the big hit (or the small hit) has been won when the plurality of decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed (effect image EG1), the liquid crystal display On the display screen of the device 1900, first, the effect image EG2 in which the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbol rows is performed appears.

  However, when the fluctuation is started at the above-mentioned timing t2 (or the above-mentioned timing t21), similar to the loss fluctuation, a shortened fluctuation that does not even the so-called reach effect (normal fluctuation when the number of reserved second special symbols is small ( (Shorter fluctuation)) is executed. Therefore, the timing t3 (or the timing t31) when a time (for example, 0.099 seconds) shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls has elapsed since the variation of the plurality of decorative symbol rows was started ), A plurality of decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed (effect image EG3).

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, as the effect image EG3 in which a plurality of decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed, makes the decorative symbol in the left column and the decorative symbol in the right column the same symbol, and By adopting a symbol combination (combination in which a chance symbol appears) in which the decorative symbol in the middle row is a chance symbol (“SP” in the diagram), a high expectation effect from this timing t3 (or the above timing t31) ( Conventionally, the player can understand that the one that corresponds to the reach effect that has been performed during the change of the symbol is started.

  In this way, after the high-expectation effect is started early, in the interval period (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181) until the big winning hole 2103 is opened according to the winning of the big hit or the small hit (see FIG. 180 and FIG. 181) Then, a specific effect content that causes the player's gaze to be shifted appears.

  That is, first, as shown in FIG. 183, whether the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in which the effect image EG3 appears is broken so that a plurality of decorative symbol rows (combinations in which chance symbols appear) cannot be visually recognized. Such an effect image EG4 appears. Next, the effect image EG5 is depicted in which the ally character, who is the main character, challenges the enemy character, whose identity is unknown, to fight.

  Here, the identity of the enemy character is one of the four types of monsters described later (see FIG. 186), and a special effect result (a winning image shown in FIG. 187) in the high-expectation effect depending on the type. EG14a ") appears differently.

  Therefore, when the effect image EG5 appears, "which monster this enemy character is" is the information of interest to the player. Therefore, after the effect image EG5 appears, as shown in FIG. 183 and FIG. 184, the effect image EG6 and the effect image EG7 are the effects such that the face portion of the enemy character gradually increases. I try to appear one after another.

  Further, in the effect image EG7, effect display indicating that acceptance of effect operation by the player (such as pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405) is permitted is performed, and the effect display is performed. When the player performs an effect operation (a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) within a predetermined time, the effect proceeds by following the effect route indicated by the solid line in the figure. . It should be noted that, in the same effect display, a display is provided in which it is possible to grasp in real time how long a predetermined time period during which the acceptance of the effect operation is permitted remains.

  That is, in the production route indicated by the solid line in the figure, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to operate based on the production operation by the player (such as the pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 405). The effect screen is darkened, and, in the darkened background image, an effect image EG8a that causes a lightning strike toward the closed special winning opening 2103 appears.

  However, in this embodiment, a predetermined light emitting member H extending from the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the special winning opening 2103 is provided on the board surface of the game panel 1200. In this regard, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the effect image EG8a to appear on the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, lightning within the effect screen extends to the special winning opening 2103 due to the light emission of the light emitting member H outside the effect screen. I try to realize it as a production like that. When the game panel 1200 is provided as a transparent plate, the light emitting member H outside the effect screen may be formed on the back side of the game panel 1200.

  That is, in this case, lightning within the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (further, light emission of the light emitting member H outside the effect screen) prompts the player to gaze from the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the special winning opening 2103 side. It becomes possible (specific performance contents within the interval period).

  Here, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, when the player's gaze is urged toward the special winning opening 2103 side in this manner, the timing t4 (or the timing t41) at which the interval period ends is reached, The control for the effect from the effect image EG1 to the effect image EG8a is performed (the effect contents in the interval period shown in FIG. 180 and FIG. 181).

  Then, at the timing t4 (or the timing t41), an effect opening mode (see FIGS. 169 (c) and 179) corresponding to the type of the big hit (or the small hit) obtained as a result of the big hit lottery appears. In addition, while the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is operated, the control for the effect light emission from the inside of the special winning opening which is in the open state is performed (the opening shown in FIGS. 180 and 181). Production during the period).

  Further, on the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 after the player is urged to gaze toward the special winning opening 2103, a darkened display state is maintained as a specific static effect mode. Then, the player can concentrate on the special winning movable effect as to whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is opened in the long effect opening with the highest expectation. It should be noted that the specific static effect mode may be a mode in which new effect information does not appear on the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to displaying the high-expectation effect in the stop mode, new effect information may be displayed. You may make it perform a dynamic display (for example, greatly reduce the progress speed of high expectation production) in the range where (new expectation level information) does not appear.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, by confirming the opening mode (short effect open, medium effect open, long effect open) of the special winning opening 2103 which is performed in the high expected effect, the special effect in the high expected effect is confirmed. It is possible to grasp the degree of expectation (probability) for the production result (the winning image shown in FIG. 186) to appear. However, as shown in FIG. 169 (c) and FIG. 179, since the opening time of each of them is only a difference of 0.6 seconds, if the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is not visually recognized carefully, There is an inconvenience that it is not possible to grasp the degree of expectation in high-expectation production.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, when the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is short production opening (0.6 seconds), blue light is emitted from the inside of the large winning opening 2103 in the open state. Control to be done. Similarly, when the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is medium performance opening (1.2 seconds), blue and green are displayed at intervals of 0.6 seconds from the inside of the special winning opening 2103 in the open state. When the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 is the long production opening (1.8 seconds), it is controlled to emit light sequentially, and from the inside of the large winning opening 2103 in the open state, at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Control is performed so that blue, green, and red light emission is sequentially performed.

  In this way, the effect is supplementarily added to the game content that appears under the control of the main control MPU 4140a (the emission color is switched according to the opening time of the special winning opening 2103). Therefore, even if the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 performed in the high expectation production has only a difference of 0.6 seconds, it is closed in any light emitting state. Only by confirming that, it is possible to grasp the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103, and thus the degree of expectation in the high-anticipated performance. Thereby, although the light emission effect is performed by the control on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, "expected by the length of time (0.6 seconds to 1.2 seconds) during which the special winning opening 2103 is continuously opened. With respect to the novel performance with the action itself of the special winning opening 2103 such as "to be able to grasp the degree in stages", it becomes possible to maintain it appropriately.

  During the period in which the special winning opening 2103 is performing the effect opening operation in the high-expectation production, the production screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a darkened state so that the attention to the special winning opening 2103 is maintained. The effect image EG9a is maintained. Therefore, a new effect is not performed within the effect screen.

  On the other hand, in the effect image EG7, within the predetermined time during which the effect display indicating that the acceptance of the effect operation by the player is permitted is being performed, the effect operation by the player (press operation on the pressing operation unit 405 is performed. If there is no such), the effect will proceed by following the effect route shown by the dotted line in the figure.

  That is, in the production route indicated by the dotted line in the figure, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the production screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the basis of the end of the predetermined time period in which the player is allowed to receive the production operation. The control is performed so that the effect image EG8b is in the dark state. Then, the timing t4 (or the timing t41) comes, and an effect opening mode according to the kind of the big hit (or the small hit) obtained as a result of the big hit lottery (see FIG. 169 (c) and FIG. 179). Even in the situation where appears, the effect image EG9b in which this dark state is maintained is made to appear.

  That is, in the production route indicated by the dotted line in the figure, the production that prompts the player to gaze from the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the special winning opening 2103 side (such as a lightning strike) or the large winning opening 2103 in the open state. The above-mentioned control related to the light emission from inside is not performed. Therefore, although the opportunity for winning a prize ball is provided by opening the special winning opening 2103 while the high-expectation performance is being performed, it is difficult to understand the degree of expectation and the acquisition of the prize ball in the high-expectation performance. It will progress.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 185, when the timing t5 (or timing t51) at which the big winning opening 2103 that has been in the open state is closed comes, the interval between the rounds shown in FIG. 180 (or in FIG. (Interval after opening) shown. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first acoustically outputs the battle BGM. In addition, on the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image EG10 and the effect image EG11 are sequentially displayed as an effect such that the battle screen is gradually enlarged in the image in the dark state. There is. It should be noted that a battle BGM is prepared separately for each of the characters A to D described later, and even if the effect image EG10 and the effect image EG11 appear, any of the characters B to D from the battle BGM is displayed. It may be possible to know whether or not it appears. Further, in the situation where the effect images EG10 and EG11 are appearing, if the battle BGM of the character D is acoustically output halfway, then it is switched to the battle BGM of the character A and acoustically output. It becomes possible to change the expectation of a special effect result from a state in which the game has not yet appeared, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 186, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the effect images EG12a-d in which any of the characters A-D appears as enemy characters in the battle screen thus enlarged. To do.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment determines the effect content determination table for the big hit shown in FIG. 188 (a) and the effect content determination table for the small hit (special loss) shown in FIG. 188 (b). And a table.

  Here, in the effect content determination table at the time of the big hit, the types of big hits obtained as a result of the big hit lottery and the characters A to D are associated with each other. For example, a character B having a medium expectation and a character C having a low expectation are shown in the figure for the 16R probability variation big hit A in which the short performance is released in the first round. The selection ratios shown correspond to each other.

  Further, in the effect content determination table at the time of small hit, the types of small hits obtained as a result of the big hit lottery are associated with the characters A to D, respectively. For example, for a small hit a in which a short effect is released, a character B having a medium degree of expectation, a character C having a low degree of expectation, and a battle mode (high-probability time saving state) The character D having a risk of ending is associated with each other at the selection ratio shown in the drawing.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a acquires a predetermined effect random number at the time of executing the high-expectation effect (for example, timing t3 (or timing t31)), and the acquired effect random number is assigned. The type of character is decided based on the effect content determination table at the time of a big hit (in the case of a small hit, the effect content determination table at the time of a small hit).

  Note that, based on the content (type of character) of the high-expectation effect determined in this way, a notice effect indicating the degree of expectation may be additionally performed on the effect images EG4 to EG7 described above (for example, , The color of the clothes of the teammate character differs according to the degree of expectation). However, if such a notice effect is not performed, if it is within the period up to the timing t5 (or the above timing t51) at the latest, during the execution of the high expected effect, the effect content determination table at the time of the big hit (small hit) In this case, the effect content (character type) may be determined based on the effect content determination table for the small hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 187, after one of the characters A to D (effect images EG12a to d) appears as an enemy character on the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, first, a character of this type of appearance. And the effect image EG13 in which the ally character, who is the main character, fights is depicted. Next, an effect image showing the result of this battle appears.

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment is provided with three types of effect images 14a to 14c as effect images in which the result of the battle is depicted. When one of 16R certainty variation jackpot A, 16R certainty variation jackpot B, and 16R certainty variation jackpot C is obtained as the result of the jackpot lottery (when a result advantageous to the player is obtained), a teammate character The effect image EG14a in which the player has won is displayed. In addition, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when 4R certainty variation jackpot D, 4R certainty variation jackpot E, 4R regular jackpot b and 4R regular jackpot c are obtained (when a result unfavorable to the player is obtained) Causes the effect image EG14c in which the teammate character is defeated to appear.

  On the other hand, as a result of the big hit lottery, if the big hit is lost, but the small hit (special loss) is obtained (if the big hit is lost and the game state can not change), The effect image EG14b in which the enemy character abandons the battle and escapes is displayed.

  That is, in the high-expectation effect according to the present embodiment, it is shown that the effect image EG14a and the effect image EG14c have been won, and the effect image EG14b has been defeated (missed). Has become.

  Here, when a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, the peripheral control MPU 4140a arrives at the timing t6 when the interval between the rounds ends when the big hit effect images EG14a and EG14c appear in this way. Therefore, the control relating to the effect image is performed (effect in the inter-round interval shown in FIG. 180).

  Therefore, when the effect image EG14a appears, after the timing t6, while the opportunity to win a large number of prize balls is given by the big hit game from the second round to the 16th round, the effect image EG15a during the big hit game is displayed. Will appear. It should be noted that, even after the jackpot game in which a large number of prize ball acquisition opportunities are given in this way, the player is again controlled to a highly accurate short time state (battle mode) advantageous to the player, so in the effect image EG15a, the game is A goal achievement production is performed in which it is possible for the player to understand that a result (big hit) with a high game value has been obtained.

  On the other hand, when the effect image EG14c appears, after the timing t6, the effect image 15c appears during the big hit game from the second round to the fourth round. However, as described above, in this big hit game, not only is the big winning hole 2103 opened in a manner where winning a prize ball is difficult, but after the big hit game is over, the normal game state (low probability A last chance effect, which will be described later, that may return to the time saving state is performed. Therefore, in this effect image EG15c, the purpose failure effect is performed in which it is possible for the player to know that the result (big hit) of low game value has been obtained.

  On the other hand, when the effect image EG14d appears, it means that the game has been lost to the big hit, so that the game state (high-accuracy short-time state) so far is only continued and no change occurs.

  Incidentally, according to the setting mode in the effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), as shown in FIG. 189, the effect of causing the character A to appear on the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the image EG12a appears, the probability that the effect image EG14a will appear as a result of high-expectation effect is 70%, the probability that the effect image EG14b will appear is 30%, and the effect image EG14c will be 0%. Further, when the effect image EG12b that causes the character B to appear, the probability that the effect image EG14a will appear as a result of the high-expectation effect is 30%, the probability that the effect image EG14b will appear is 70%, and the effect image EG14c will be The probability of appearance is 0%. When the effect image EG12c that causes the character C to appear, the probability that the effect image EG14a will appear as a result of the high-expectation effect is 5.6%, and the effect image EG14b will be 94.4%. The probability that the effect image EG14c will appear is 0%. Further, when the effect image EG12d that causes the character D to appear, the probability that the effect image EG14a will appear as a result of the high-expectation effect is 0%, the probability that the effect image EG14b will appear is 59%, and the effect image EG14c will be The probability of appearance is 41%.

  According to such a configuration, as long as the character D does not appear, it is determined that the current game state is at least continued, and a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained is performed (ally. You can enjoy it as a challenge production for the character to win). Since the character B has a higher degree of expectation than the character C and the character A has a higher degree of expectation than the character B, even in the high expectation production after the symbol is stopped, "a character having a different degree of expectation" It will be possible to have fun such as "Which one will appear?"

  Even when the character D appears, the current game state is continued rather than the probability that a last chance effect, which will be described later, that may return to the normal game state (low probability non-time saving state) is performed. Since the probability is higher, the entertainment of the game is maintained. In addition, the game value of losing (small hit) is positioned as higher than some big hits (4R certainty big hit D, 4R certainty big hit E, 4R regular big hit b and 4R regular big hit c) to function as an effect. This makes it possible to maintain the amusement interest when a loss is shown as a result of the high expectation production.

  Further, according to the setting mode in the effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), as shown in FIG. 190, the large winning opening 2103 is short while the high expected effect is being performed. When the production is released (blue emission), the appearance rate of the character A is 0%, the appearance rate of the character B is 15.3%, the appearance rate of the character C is 52%, and the appearance rate of the character D is 32.7. %. Further, when the special winning opening 2103 is open for medium production (green emission) while the high-expectation production is being performed, the appearance rate of the character A is 17.4%, the appearance rate of the character B is 29%, and the character is 29%. The appearance rate of C is 42.2%, and the appearance rate of character D is 11.4%. Further, when the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (red light emission) while the high-expectation effect is being performed, the appearance rate of the character A is 100%, and the appearance rates of the other characters B to D are 0%. Become.

  According to such a configuration, as the production opening time becomes longer, a character having a high degree of advantage for the player is likely to appear, and a character having a risk to the player is likely to be less likely to appear. Becomes In particular, when the long production opening with the longest opening time appears, the character A having the highest advantage degree and no risk is always appeared. As a result, the movement of the special winning opening 2103 itself while the high-expectation effect is being performed can be made to function as an important effect element.

  As described above, according to the high expectation effect when the big hit or the small hit is won under the specific condition (battle mode), the special winning opening 2103 is opened while the effect is being performed. Therefore, even if a big hit is not obtained, it is possible to make the high expectation production itself useful so that at least a prize ball can be obtained. In other words, in this case, since the actual benefit of winning a prize ball will be realized as much as the high expected production is performed, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while improving the production performance in a specific game state. Will be able to.

  Further, according to such a high expectation effect, since the expectation degree (see FIG. 190) is indicated by the operation of the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 while the effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display Even during the period in which the high expectation effect that tends to deprive the display screen of the device 1900 is performed, it is possible to urge the player to pay close attention to the special winning opening 2103 side. As a result, the player can enjoy the high-expectation production while having the feeling that the high-expectation production itself has been made profitable by giving the opportunity to win a prize ball, and by extension, the high-expectation production at the time of loss. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the effect (effect image EG14b) is performed.

  Further, according to such a high expectation effect, a progress schedule for the high expectation effect regarding whether or not a big hit is obtained is executed in accordance with the operation of the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 (effect image). EG4 to EG14). That is, in this case, a special result is obtained in the jackpot lottery, while recognizing that the player is surely controlled to an advantageous game situation such as "at least winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2103". It becomes possible to entertain the production with high expectations about whether or not (high-expected production).

  Further, according to such a high expectation production, the operation itself of the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 also has a function as a conventional production accessory, and such a novel production brings about amusement of interest. Can be improved.

  Further, in such a high expectation effect, a specific character effect is made to appear after the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, unlike the case where the content of the effect that has already been determined is only displayed with a delay, it is possible to realize a novel effect with a fundamental change from the control structure related to the effect. Like

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained under a specific condition, the opening mode of the special winning opening 2103 of the first round is the same as in the case of losing (small hit). By doing so, the production situation in which either a big hit or a loss may have been obtained is extended to a specific period after the symbols stop (the period until the opening of the second round is started). I am trying. As a result, originally, an effect that should be performed while the symbol is being changed (effect as to whether it is a big hit or a loss) can be realized within the time after the symbol is stopped. As a result, the high expectation production itself can be made profitable by giving the opportunity of winning a prize ball.

  Note that, with regard to such a high expectation effect, not only under a specific condition (battle mode), but also when a game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 in a normal game state (low-probability non-time saving state). You may make it similarly.

  For example, in a normal game state (low-probability non-time saving state), when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102, the shortening variation as described above is performed regardless of the lottery result and the number of holdings. May be. Further, instead of the effects such as the effect images EG1 to EG3, a small pattern (a small pattern such as a symbol pattern, which is different from the decorative pattern) in the corner of the effect screen may be changed. That is, in this case, in the normal game state (low-probability non-time saving state), when the game ball is received at the second starting opening 2102, basically, a large effect is not started. As long as a big hit or a small hit is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, since the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102, the effects after the effect image EG4 will be started immediately. You will be able to add surprise and great expectations.

  However, even under a specific condition (battle mode), when the game ball is accepted in the first starting opening 2101, the above-mentioned high-expected performance is started because the small hit is not won. There is no such thing. That is, in this case, as in the case of the normal game state, the result of the big hit is shown during the fluctuation time of the symbol, and the big hit game is started after it is shown that the big hit has been won. .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the high expectation effect is started from the timing t3 when the symbol variation is stopped, but from the timing t2 when the symbol variation is started, or a specific timing between the timings t2 and t3. You may control so that a high expectation production may be started.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the high expectation effect is performed until the timing t6 when the time between rounds ends (or the timing t61 when the waiting time after opening the small hit ends), but the special winning opening 2103 is closed. The high expectation effect may be ended at a specific timing from timing t5 to timing t6 (or timing t61 at which the waiting time after the small hit opening ends).

  Further, when a big hit is obtained, an effect (a winning image or the like) indicating that the big hit is obtained may appear after the timing t6 when the time between rounds ends. In this case, it is desirable that either one of the effect images 14b and 14c is temporarily displayed until the timing t6 when the time between rounds ends, and then the effect image 14a appears after the timing t6.

  As described above, when the number of reserved second special symbols is “4”, which is the maximum number, until the next symbol fluctuation that is in the suspended state is started (until the suspension is released) The control period is a time (0.599 seconds) that is less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Therefore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum number, even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds are successively received in the second starting opening 2102, those game balls are It is possible to suppress the situation where the lottery process is discharged without being used. Also, when the number of second special symbols held drops from the maximum number to "3", until the next symbol fluctuation that is in the held state is started (until the hold is released) Since the control period is a slightly longer time (0.601 seconds) than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds), it suppresses the generation of game balls discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. Meanwhile, it becomes possible to allow the number of second special symbols to be held to the maximum.

  Moreover, while allowing the symbol fluctuation to be repeatedly performed at the fastest speed (every time when the game ball is entered), it is also made unlikely that the symbol fluctuation will be interrupted, This also suppresses the decline in the entertainment appeal.

  In addition, during the symbol control period until the next symbol variation that is in the hold state is started (until the hold is released), the stop time of the symbol does not depend on the number of second special symbols reserved. Alternatively, it may be set at a fixed time (for example, "0.5 seconds").

  According to the second unit 2120 having such a structure, in the time saving state (high-probability time saving state, etc.), each time the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, the game ball remains in the second starting opening 2102. Since it is possible to be accepted, all the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 can be involved in the big hit lottery corresponding to the winning in the second starting opening 2102. As a result, even when the high-probability state and the high-probability state have the same low probability value, in the short-time state (high-probability time-short state, etc.) Not only will it be possible to generate the next big hit game in a reasonable time that is slightly longer, but also with a sense of speed at least until the big hit is won just by hitting the game ball A game with a small number of balls (balls not used in the lottery) will be realized.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an open region X (see FIG. 159) is provided between the closed guide passage member 2142 and the closed second unit 2120, and this region X In, in arranging an adjusting member (for example, an obstacle nail or a guide member formed by resin molding) not shown in the figure formed so as to contribute to the probability of accepting the game ball into the gate portion 2105 (second unit 2120). There is. That is, by arranging such an adjusting member, the probability of accepting the game ball into the gate portion 2105 (second unit 2120), and thus the probability of accepting into the second starting opening 2102, depending on its shape and position. Can be easily adjusted (a specific base value can be easily adjusted in a wide range including a value close to “100”). However, as described above, when the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 is operated, the second winning opening 2103 and the second winning opening 2103 are placed in a positional relationship such that the game ball is won in the second winning opening 2102. It is desirable to arrange the starting port 2102 and the starting port 2102, respectively.

  Further, the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 161), when not in the time saving state (in the normal state), by setting the winning probability of the normal win to 0%, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105. The movable piece 2106 is prevented from being opened. Alternatively, although it can be won in the normal win, until the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 reaches the second starting opening 2102 (while a substantially uniform time elapses), the above-described normal determination, the normal symbol In order to prevent the series of processing such as the variable display of No. 2 and the drive control for opening the movable piece 2106 from being executed, this series of processing is performed for a longer time. It has become more advantageous for the player to advance the game aiming to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 by left-handing, rather than aiming to enter the game ball into the starting opening 2102. There is.

  By the way, as described above, when there is acceptance (winning) in the second starting opening 2102, the special prize balls are paid out each time such acceptance is made, but from the perspective of the hall side, By allowing (accepting) a disadvantage (payout of prize balls at the time of acceptance into the second starting opening 2102), the player is given a privilege (payout of prize balls) despite the fact that the privilege is given to the player. May play the game without recognizing that such prize balls are paid out, which may impose a burden on the hall side and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the single payout control in which the payout of the specific prize ball is "1" each time the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102, Each payout of the specific prize balls is executed on the basis of different triggers (execution is triggered by winning of a different game ball into the second starting opening 2102). Then, the specific prize balls are paid out at different timings one by one in this manner, and then the payout information (for example, the light emission triggered by the winning in the second starting opening 2102) is given to each of the specific prize balls. By individually providing the sound output), it is possible to give the player a feeling of a privilege as each specific prize ball paid out.

  Further, as described above, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost in the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. Also, a game ball is shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the player operating the handle device 500. Then, as described above, in the time saving state, the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2102 with an extremely high probability, so the holding ball of the second starting port 2102 is about 0.6 seconds. It will occur at intervals. That is, even if the variation time of the second special symbol at the time of departure is extremely shortened, the reserve ball is improved by improving the frequency of occurrence of the reserve ball of the second special symbol by hitting the game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It will not disappear immediately.

  In other words, during the time saving state, even if the control for winning a large number of game balls into the second starting opening 2102 in an extremely short time is executed, by performing the variable display of the second special symbol in an extremely short time, the second It is possible to prevent an increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and to extremely increase the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is changed per unit time as compared with the non-time saving state. As a result, in the high-probability time-saving state in which the transition control to the right-handed state is performed, in addition to the time-saving control and the control for improving the occurrence frequency of the holding balls, the control for improving the winning probability of the jackpot is executed. Compared with, it is possible to win the next big hit in an extremely short time, and it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in a short time.

  Here, in the above-mentioned embodiment, among the game balls accepted by the second unit 2120, the game balls not accepted by the second starting opening 2102 are supplied to the special winning opening 2103. The winning opening 2103 may be provided between the gate portion 2105 and the second starting opening 2102. That is, in this case, even if the small hitting game state occurs in the time saving state, the game ball hit right is not accepted by the second starting opening 2102, but is easily accepted by the big winning opening 2103. Become. As a result, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 (the second starting opening 2102 that can be entered only by hitting the right) during the period when the symbol variation is not performed due to the occurrence of the small hitting game state. Can be avoided, and it is possible to suppress the generation of game balls that have not entered the lottery despite having entered the second starting opening 2102.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as a technique b relating to an effect, a variable time for a plurality of times (a low-expected effect mode (normal fluctuation)) is added (reserved) in real time as one time for performing a long effect. While doing so, during the long production time that is added (secured) in real time in this way, when the game ball is accepted into the second starting opening 2102, the status of suspension or fluctuation of the symbol Regardless, it was decided that this acceptance would be used as an opportunity to produce an effect that causes a change in the background image. However, even if the background image is not changed upon the acceptance of the game ball, a long production time can be secured. In other words, in this case, depending on whether or not the lottery held is “0”, the background image (when it is “0”, the ally character is confronting to fight the enemy character). Along with different videos, unless the lottery that is on hold is "0", free production that is not tied to the timing of changing decorative designs or the timing of accepting game balls (continuous attack by team characters) )I do. Then, based on the continuous attacks by such teammate characters, is there a lottery held in a pending state (or one in which a highly anticipated production mode appears)? Or, when it is determined that the current pattern change is a high-expectation form, the enemy character loses balance due to an attack (continuous attack) by the teammate character, and a depiction that shows a skim, and further, the teammate character shows the enemy character In addition to performing a special move (great skill), the effect image is controlled so that any of the above-described moving images A to C appears as a background image in the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the result of the lottery.

  In addition, as for the second unit 2120, all of the game balls received by the gate portion 2105 may be inserted into the second starting opening 2102 when in the time saving state. That is, in this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to "100%", and "the time from the start of the fluctuation of the regular symbol to the fixed stop, the movable piece 2106 is opened, and further the movable piece 2106. "From the open state to the closed state until the next start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (detection of the game ball by detection by the gate sensor 2126) is allowed (interval time)", the game that has passed through the gate portion 2105 The time is shorter than the time required for the sphere to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2106.

  For example, the variation time of the normal symbol is always "0.08 seconds", the time from when the symbol of the normal symbol is fixedly displayed until the movable piece 2106 is opened is "0.008 seconds", the movable piece 2106 is The time maintained in the open state is “0.2 seconds”, and the time (interval time) from when the movable piece 2106 is changed from the open state to the closed state until the fluctuation start of the next normal symbol is permitted is “0”. .05 seconds ”is desirable. According to such a configuration, even if the two game balls that have been driven in pass through the gate portion 2105 in succession, a series of processing relating to the normal symbol for the game ball that was previously fired ends. At that stage, it becomes possible to start a series of processes relating to the normal design of the game ball that is next fired.

  Further, when all the game balls received in the gate portion 2105 are to be inserted into the second starting opening 2102, the normal symbol holding function is not provided. That is, when such a normal symbol holding function is provided, the timing of the change disclosure of the normal symbol is shifted from the timing at which the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, whereby the movable piece 2106 is opened. This is because the chances that the game ball will arrive at the timing of the state may be greatly reduced.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when any one of the 4R certainty variation big hit B, the 4R certainty variation big hit C, the 4R certainty variation big hit D, the 4R certainty variation big hit E, the 4R regular big jackpot b, the 4R regular big jackpot c is won, they are After the big hit game according to the winning type is played, it will be controlled in a time saving state. And, as the variation time for the first special symbol after being controlled to this time saving state, whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a relatively long time which is set in advance (for example, 40 seconds) is always determined, and this variation time is used to perform a chance production as to whether or not the time saving state is maintained until the next big hit game state occurs.

  That is, if either 4R probability variation big hit B or 4R probability variation big hit C is won, in each case, the 4R jackpot game by opening for a long time is first played, but after the 4R jackpot game Depending on the winning type, there is a big difference whether the time saving state is maintained until the next big hit game occurs or the time saving state is maintained only once. Nonetheless, after the completion of these jackpot games, it is concealed as a secret that which jackpot is the winning jackpot according to which winning type (big hit game), including the 4R jackpot game being played for a long time. , Using the time of the first symbol fluctuation after the time saving function is enabled, it is supposed to perform a chance production as to whether or not the time saving state is maintained until the next big hit gaming state occurs. .

  Similarly, if any of 4R probability variation big hit D, 4R probability variation big hit E, 4R normal jackpot b, 4R normal jackpot c is won, in any case, the 4R jackpot game by opening for a short time is first After the 4R big hit game, depending on the winning species, there is a big difference whether the short-time state is maintained until the next big-hit game occurs or the time-saving state is maintained only once. is there. Nevertheless, after the completion of these jackpot games, it is concealed that it is the jackpot winning (jackjack game) according to which winning type, including the 4R jackpot game by opening for a short time. , Using the time of the first symbol fluctuation after the time saving function is enabled, it is supposed to perform a chance production as to whether or not the time saving state is maintained until the next big hit gaming state occurs. . Although there is a difference between the low-probability state and the high-probability state here, it can be said that this is a small difference because the probabilities are the same here.

  For example, as the chance effect, on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the symbol variation showing the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed in a small size, and even an effect such as reach variation is not performed. It is desirable that at least as long as the lottery result of the special symbol is lost by using the variable time, only the production of whether or not the time saving state is continued until the next big hit game occurs is displayed. Then, during such a performance period, each time a game ball shot at an interval of 0.6 seconds is successively received in the second starting opening 2102, whether the time saving state is continued until the next big hit game occurs. It is desirable to perform display control in which the degree of production expectation is shown in order to maintain the amusement of the game.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine (pachinko machine) according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is basically the same as the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. However, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, first, in place of the special winning opening 2103 of the first embodiment, in the area where the right-handed game ball flows down, the gate portion 2105 or the second The special winning opening 5103 is provided at a position on the upstream side of the starting opening 2102 (the position where the front right outside effect unit 2700 was provided in the first embodiment).

  That is, the special winning opening 5103 according to this embodiment has a blade-shaped opening / closing member (movable part) 5107, and the opening / closing member 5107 rotates in the mode shown in FIGS. 191 and 192. This creates a state where the right-handed game ball cannot be received (FIG. 191) and a state where the game ball can be received (FIG. 192). In addition, in each state, a broken line arrow indicates a path along which the right-handed game ball flows down.

  However, the special winning opening 5103 according to this embodiment includes the opening / closing member 5107 as one of a plurality of movable parts, and is movable by the plurality of movable parts in addition to the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is provided as an effect movable accessory 5100 capable of executing an effect.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 191, this effect movable accessory 5100 is formed as a doll-shaped accessory that imitates a fairy, and as the plurality of movable parts, an opening / closing member 5107 that serves as the fairy's left wing is formed. In addition, the first effect character 5111 which is the fairy's right arm, the second effect character 5112 which is the fairy's left arm, the third effect character 5113 which is the fairy's right foot, and the fourth which is the fairy's left foot. A production accessory 5114 is provided.

  Here, the first effect character (right arm) 5111, the second effect character (left arm) 5112, the third effect character (right foot) 5113, and the fourth effect character (left foot). 5114 is operably provided within a range from each initial position shown in FIG. 191 to each effect position shown in FIG. 192. That is, when the action by these effect actors 5111 to 5114 is performed, a predetermined actor effect (in the figure, the fairy cheers the player on the doll-shaped actor (imitation movable actor 5100) that imitates a fairy. Poses).

  On the other hand, the opening / closing member (left blade part) 5107 is also provided so as to be operable within the range from the initial position shown in FIG. 191 to the effect position shown in FIG. 192, and such rotation is possible. When it is performed, a character effect that appears as if a doll-shaped character object (effect movable object 5100) imitating a fairy is flapping appears. However, when the operation by the opening / closing member (left blade part) 5107 is performed, it goes without saying that a doll-shaped role object (representative movable role object 5100) imitating a fairy is flapping. The game ball can be received in the special winning opening 5103.

  In addition to the movable parts 5107, 5111 to 5114, the effect movable role object 5100 is a non-movable part, that is, a first non-movable part 5211 that becomes a fairy's head and a second non-movable part that becomes a fairy's body. The object 5212, a third non-movable accessory 5213 which is the fairy's right blade, and a fourth non-movable accessory 5214 which is the fairy's lower blade are provided.

  Here, among these non-movable parts 5211 to 5214, a first non-movable accessory (head) 5211, a second non-movable accessory (body) 5212, and a third non-movable accessory (right blade part) 5213. As shown in FIG. 192, is arranged at a position overlapping the special winning opening 5103 in a front view from the player side. However, the first non-movable accessory (head) 5211 and the second non-movable accessory (body) 5212 form an opening passage (not shown) through which a game ball can pass, between a game panel 5150 described later. As described above, it is formed of a flat plate-shaped member. Therefore, when the special winning opening 5103 is opened, a game ball can be received through an opening passage (not shown) between the flat plate members 5211 and 5212 and the game panel 5150.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the second embodiment includes a game panel 5150 made of transparent resin, instead of the game panel 1150 of the first embodiment. In this regard, the third non-movable accessory (right blade part) 5213 and the fourth non-movable accessory (lower blade part) 5214 are provided in the space on the back side of the game panel 5150 made of transparent resin. Therefore, when the special winning opening 5103 is opened, it is flat without being obstructed by the third non-movable accessory (right blade part) 5213 and the fourth non-movable accessory (lower blade part) 5214. The game balls can be received through the opening passages (not shown) between the members 5211 and 5212 and the game panel 5150.

  In such a production movable accessory 5100, various parts can be arranged in an overlapping manner even in the vicinity of the special winning opening 5103 where an opening passage (not shown) is required. The opening / closing member 5107 that is operable to open the special winning opening 5103 is also made to function as one of a plurality of movable parts (left wing) that forms one character body (fairy doll-shaped accessory). Will be able to. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel performance using the special winning opening 5103, which will be described later, while the performance is being performed. In particular, in combination with the effect structure according to the first embodiment described above, such as “the high winning effect itself is useful, the special winning opening 5103 is opened while the high expected effect is being performed”, , The degree of expectation of the high-expectation production, whether the high-expectation production is further advanced, or the like, it is possible to realize a novel production performance that also has a function as a conventional general production accessory that provides production information.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the symbol determination table (see FIG. 169 (c)) on the second special symbol side of the first embodiment and the symbol determination table at the time of small hit (FIG. 179) Instead of (see), a symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol shown in FIG. 193 (a) and a symbol determination table at the time of small hit shown in FIG. 193 (b) are respectively provided. The production movable accessory 5100 (the special winning opening 5103) is designed to realize a novel production property that also has a function as a conventional general production accessory.

  That is, first, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side of the second embodiment, as a type (type) of big hit on the second special symbol side, 16R probability variation Big hit A ', 16R sure change big hit B', 4R sure change big hit D ', and 4R normal big hit b'are prepared, and a pattern random number (second pattern random number: 0 to 0) for these four types (big hit types) 199) are stored so as to be associated with each other.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the specific game and effect contents for each type of big hit on the second special symbol side are as follows.
21. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, at the timing t4 when the interval period ends in the execution of the high expectation effect described later after the symbol combination at the time of occurrence in the liquid crystal display device 1900 appears, it is a big prize. The mouth 5103 is sequentially operated once for the first round with the above-mentioned short effect opening (0.6 seconds) and the above-mentioned middle effect opening (1.2 seconds), and a special effect result (winning image) is obtained. In the 2nd to 16th rounds after appearing, when the count sensor 2114 detects that the game balls have won 9 game balls in the special winning opening 5103 after being opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). By executing the opening and closing pattern to be closed, the game ball is controlled to the 16R jackpot gaming state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the jackpot 5103. Is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and in the high-probability time-saving state, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shows that it is in an advantageous state from the beginning of the production mode (battle mode). 16R probability variation big hit A'controlled by

  22. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, at the timing t4 when the interval period ends in the execution of the high expectation effect described later after the symbol combination at the time of occurrence in the liquid crystal display device 1900 appears, it is a big prize. The mouth 5103 is operated only once in the above-mentioned middle effect opening (1.2 seconds) only in the first round, and in the 2nd to 16th rounds after the special effect result (winning image) appears, each is long. After opening the time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 2114 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 5103, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game ball is executed to make the game ball large. 16R big hit game state that can enter (easy) into the winning hole 5103 is controlled, and after this 16R big hit game state, the next big hit game state occurs. Controls the high-probability time reduction state in the high-probability time-shortening conditions rendering mode that is advantageous state from the transition beginning is shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 (battle mode) 16R probability variation big hit B controlled by the '

  23. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, at the timing t4 when the interval period ends in the execution of the high expectation effect described later after the symbol combination at the time of occurrence in the liquid crystal display device 1900 appears, it is a big prize. The mouth 5103 is operated only once for the first round in the above-mentioned short effect opening (0.6 seconds), and in the second to fourth rounds after no special effect result appears, each of them is briefly opened (for example, After the 4R big hit game state, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs. In the high-probability time saving state, first, the first variation of the special symbol (more accurately, the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol After the chance effect described above only Kano first variation), 4R probability variation it is advantageous state is controlled in the effect mode (battle mode) shown in the liquid crystal display device 1900 jackpot D '

  24. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, at the timing t4 when the interval period ends in the execution of the high expectation effect described later after the symbol combination at the time of occurrence in the liquid crystal display device 1900 appears, it is a big prize. The mouth 5103 is operated only once for the first round in the above-mentioned short effect opening (0.6 seconds), and in the second to fourth rounds after no special effect result appears, each of them is briefly opened (for example, The opening and closing pattern to be closed after 0.6 seconds is controlled to the 4R big hit game state, and after this 4R big hit game state, fluctuations about the special symbol (more accurately, the first special symbol and the second symbol) Controlling to a low-probability time-saving state until one variation of the special symbol and the number of variations) is performed, and after this low-probability time-saving state ends, the next big hit game card While controlling to low probability non-time saving state until occurs, in the low probability time saving state corresponding to the variation time for one time of the special symbol, the chance production described later is performed, and in the low probability non time saving state 4R normal big hit b'controlled by production mode

  In this way, the 16R certainty variation big hit A'and the 16R certainty variation big hit B'are different from each other only in the effect operation mode of the first R, and are substantially equal in terms of game value. That is, as will be described later, these opening patterns of the first R are supposed to serve as usefulness of the high expected production itself after the end of the variation of the second special symbol and function as its production elements, whereby the time saving function operates. It is designed to improve the enjoyment of the game when it is in the game state. In addition, the time from the appearance of the symbol combination at the time of winning the 16R certainty variation big hit A'to the appearance of the above-mentioned medium effect opening (1.2 seconds) and the symbol at the time of winning the 16R certainty variation big hit B ' It is the same as the time from the appearance of the combination to the appearance of the above-mentioned medium effect release (1.2 seconds). However, only when the 16R probability variation big hit A'is won, the above short effect opening is performed within the time until the above-mentioned middle effect opening (1.2 seconds) appears.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), only the small hit a'is prepared as the type (type) of the small hit in the symbol determination table for the small hit in the second embodiment. , All of the symbol random numbers (second symbol random numbers: 0 to 199) are stored in a form associated with the small hit a '.

The specific game and effect contents of the small hit a'are as follows.
25. At least in the gaming state in which the time saving function operates, at the timing t41 when the interval period ends in the execution of the high expectation effect described later after the symbol combination at the opportunity appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the big prize is won. After operating the mouth 5103 only once in the above-described short effect opening (0.6 seconds), a small effect that causes the player to recognize that the game condition so far is maintained appears. Hit a '

  In this way, the small hit a'of the second embodiment is, as in the case of the first embodiment, even when the big hit is lost, the effect operation after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished. A mode is allowed to appear, whereby the action itself at the special winning opening 5103 (type of effect operation mode) is a production element as to whether or not a large number of prize balls can be acquired. Will work as.

  However, in the second embodiment, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot of the most advantageous type for the player (16R probability variation jackpot) has been won at the time when the middle presentation opening, which is the second opening, appears. As described above, the effect operation mode at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. 193 (a) and the effect operation mode at the time of the small hit shown in FIG. 193 (b) are set. Therefore, as will be described later, in the high expectation effect of the second embodiment, when the short effect opening which is the first opening is performed, not only the movable part 5107 is operated for 0.6 seconds, By vibrating each of the movable parts 5111 to 5114 as “rattle” (performing a specific operation), the movable parts 5111 to 5114 are caused to function as a precursor sign effect production as to whether or not a second stage medium production release, which is the second release, appears thereafter. There is. It should be noted that a predetermined effect accumulation time (a time during which all the components are in a stationary state (for example, about 2 seconds)) is set between the timing at which the precursor effect effect ends and the timing at which the middle effect opening is started. ) Is desirable.

  However, as mentioned above, when the 16R probability variation big hit B'is won, the second (actually the first) opening is done despite the fact that the short production opening, which is the first opening, is not performed. The production will be opened. Therefore, in the high-expectation production after the symbol is stopped, although the short production release, which is the first release, should be performed, if the short production release is not performed, at that time, 2 It becomes possible to recognize that the medium performance opening, which is the opening of the first time (actually the first time), is performed, and that the jackpot of the most advantageous type for the player (16R probability variation jackpot) is won. .

  Even when the 16R probability variation big hit B'is won, the movable part 5107 does not operate at the timing at which the short effect opening, which is the first opening, should be performed, but regarding the movable parts 5111 to 5114, You may make it vibrate (rattle) and vibrate (specific operation). That is, in this case, in the production movable accessory 5100, all the movable parts 5111 to 5114 except the movable part 5107 create a state in which one character body (fairy doll type accessory) performs a specific motion rattling. . Therefore, whether or not the special winning opening 5103 is opened can be grasped only when the movement of the movable part 5107 is carefully watched, and the player is hidden by such a hidden character effect. You will be able to cultivate your inquiry.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 194 to FIG. 196, in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, an example of a high expectation effect when a big hit or a small hit is won under a specific condition (battle mode) Will be explained.

  That is, now, at the timing t3 (or the timing t31) after the effect images EG1 and EG2 appear, it is assumed that a plurality of decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed in a combination in which chance symbols appear (shown in FIG. 182). Directed image EG3). That is, in this case, also in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194, the effect image EG3 is set so that a plurality of decorative symbol rows (combinations in which chance symbols appear) cannot be visually recognized. The effect image EG4 that appears as if the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that has appeared is broken is made to appear.

  Next, the ally character, which is the main character, sequentially causes the effect images EG25 and EG26 in which it is depicted that the hero character challenges the specific enemy character. Then, as shown in FIG. 195, a still image in a state in which it is unclear whether or not a specific enemy character is attacked by a teammate character who is the main character appears as an effect image EG27. It should be noted that this still image only needs to be in a static effect mode in which new effect information does not appear on the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to displaying the high-expectation effect in the stopped mode, a new effect is displayed. You may make it perform dynamic display in the range where information (new expectation degree information) does not appear (for example, greatly reduce the progress speed of high expectation production).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the second embodiment, when the effect image EG27 as such a still image appears, the timing t4 (or the timing t41) at which the interval period ends is reached. Therefore, the control relating to the effects from the effect image EG1 to the effect image EG27 is performed.

  Therefore, at the timing t4 (or the timing t41), while the effect image EG27 as a still image appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the opening / closing member (movable) of the special winning opening 5103 is controlled by the main control MPU 4100a. The component) 5107 will operate with the above-described short presentation open (0.6 seconds). At the same time, by the control by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the movable parts 5111 to 5114 each vibrate and "vibrate" (specific operation), so that a second production of the intermediate production opening, which is an opening, is performed. The sign precursor effect production by 5100 will be performed.

  In addition, in this precursor sign effect, movements of the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of the special winning opening 5103 and the movable parts 5111 to 5114 do not necessarily need to be synchronized. For example, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the second embodiment, the movable parts 5111 to 5114 are vibrated rattlingly by being driven at intervals of 0.1 seconds, so that the player can watch the effect movable accessory 5100. Are encouraged. Further, the respective movements of the movable parts 5111 to 5114 do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

  Then, after the precursor sign effect is performed in this way, while the effect image EG28 as a still image appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the second effect of the middle effect release (1. 2 seconds), 16R certainty variation big hit A'is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, so that the effect is advanced by following the effect route shown by the solid line in the figure.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first starts the movement of the movable parts 5111 to 5114 of the effect movable accessory 5100 so as to match the start of the middle effect opening (1.2 seconds) by the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107. Then, the movable parts 5111 to 5114 thus started to operate are maintained at the respective production positions shown in FIG. 192.

  It should be noted that the time for which the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 is opened for medium production (1.2 seconds) is the same as the time for which the movable parts 5111 to 5114 are maintained at the effect position. As a result, although it is a production movable accessory 5100 that uses the opening / closing member (movable component) 5107 of the special winning opening 5103 as one of the movable components, it is an accessory production by one character body (fairy doll type accessory). Will be suitably realized. Further, in the figure, while the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 is performing the medium effect opening (1.2 seconds), the entire effect movable accessory 5100 emits light.

  Here, when such a medium effect opening appears, it is possible to recognize at that point that the jackpot of the most advantageous type for the player (16R probability variation jackpot) has been won. Is mentioned above.

  Therefore, when the timing t5 at which the special winning opening 2103 that has been in the open state is closed due to the medium presentation opening (1.2 seconds), as shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the attack by the ally character who is the main character is performed. After the effect image EG29 received by the specific enemy character appears, the effect image EG14a in which the victory of the teammate character is depicted appears. Then, after the production image EG14a appears, as in the case of the first embodiment, a large number of award balls are given by the big hit game from the second round to the 16th round after the timing t6. In the meantime, the effect image (purpose achievement effect) EG15a during the big hit game will appear.

  However, as described above, even at the timing t4, the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of the special winning opening 5103 is operated (short effect open) only when the 16R probability variation big hit B'is won. There is no. That is, in this case, by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, only the movable parts 5111 to 5114 except the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 vibrate “rattling”, whereby the precursor movable part effect by the effect movable part 5100 is produced. Will be done. Then, after the precursor sign effect is performed in this manner, the effect proceeds as described above by following the effect route indicated by the solid line in the figure, as in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit A '. Images EG28, EG29, EG14a, EG15a).

  On the other hand, while the effect image EG28 as a still image appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 after the precursor effect effect is performed by the effect movable accessory 5100, the second opening is performed by the control by the main control MPU 4100a. If the production release (1.2 seconds) does not appear, as a result of the big hit lottery, one of 4R certainty variation big hit D ', 4R normal big hit b'and small hit a'is obtained. The production will proceed by following the production route indicated by the dotted line.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first maintains the movable parts 5111 to 5114 of the production movable accessory 5100 at the initial position, so that the type of jackpot most advantageous to the player (16R accurate variation). Make it possible to recognize that the jackpot) has not been won.

  When timing t5 (or timing t51) arrives without the middle effect release (1.2 seconds) appearing, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the specific enemy character to avoid the attack by the ally character who is the main character. The image EG39 appears. Then, after this, when either the 4R probability variation big hit D'or the 4R normal big hit b'is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, it is depicted that the teammate character has been defeated, as shown in FIG. 196. The effect image EG14c is displayed. Then, after this effect image EG14c appears, as in the case of the first embodiment, the effect image 15c during the big hit game from the second round to the fourth round after the timing t6. Will appear. In this big hit game, not only is the special winning opening 5103 opened in a manner where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, but also after the big hit game is finished, a normal game state (low probability non-time saving state) The fact that the above-mentioned last chance effect that may return to step 1 is performed is also the same as in the case of the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, as a result of the big hit lottery, when the big hit is lost but the small hit a '(special loss) is obtained, it is described that the enemy character abandons the battle and escapes. The effect image EG14b appears. When this effect image EG14d appears, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, since it is a loss that was lost to the big hit, only the game state (high accuracy time saving state) so far is continued. , No change occurs.

  As described above, also in the high-expectation effect according to the second embodiment, it is indicated that the effect image EG14a and the effect image EG14c are won in the big hit, and the effect image EG14b is lost (missed) in the big hit. It shows that.

  As described above, according to the high-expectation effect according to the second embodiment, the state in which the effect development in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed (the high-expectation effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is the stop mode) In the images EG27 and EG28), depending on whether or not the production movable accessory 5100 including the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of the special winning opening 5013 operates, the destination of development of the production (solid or dotted production route). ) Is indicated. At the same time, the production progress in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is restarted so that the production content of the indicated destination appears. In this way, the control result of the game by the main control MPU 4100a is taken in as the effect element in the effect movable accessory 5100, and the effect progress in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is restarted according to the effect result. Then, unlike the conventional false effect, it is possible to entertain the high-expectation effect according to the actual game situation by the main control MPU 4100a. That is, in this case, a high expectation effect is realized in which the game value is actually changed depending on the progress of the effect.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment includes a production movable accessory 5100 having the opening / closing member 5107 of the special winning opening 5013 as one movable component, and the so-called production of an accessory is realized by the production movable auditor 5100. (See FIG. 195). As a result, it is possible to entertain the player with an opportunity to win a prize ball, and at the same time, enjoy the effect (effect effect) using the effect object having high expectations.

  In particular, according to the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, in addition to the effect mode in which both the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of the special winning opening 5013 and the other movable parts 5111 to 5114 operate, the special winning opening 5013 There is an effect mode in which only the other movable parts 5111 to 5114 except the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of FIG. Therefore, even though the effect production is performed by the effect movable accessory 5100 having the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of the special winning opening 5013 as one movable part, it is not always premised that the control by the main control MPU 4100a is performed. It is possible to provide a high-expectation production using the special winning opening 2103 (production movable accessory 5100) under a production design having a high degree of freedom.

  In this sense, for example, even during the changing period of the special symbol, the effect movable auditors object 5100 is in an effect mode in which only the other movable parts 5111 to 5114 except the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of the special winning opening 5013 operate. You may make it perform a character effect. For example, based on the result of the big hit lottery, only the movable parts 5111 to 5114 are vibrated as "rattle" while the special symbol is changing, and the special symbol is generated during the vibration (or after the vibration). Stop display. Then, when the big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, when the interval period (production accumulation time) after the special symbol is stopped is displayed, it is movable with the opening / closing member (movable part) 5107 of the special winning opening 5013. If the parts 5111 to 5114 are operated up to the respective production positions, it is possible to realize a novel production as if the big hit game was directly started from the production of the production by the production movable accessory 5100. . In addition, when a loss is obtained as a result of the big hit lottery, after the predetermined time has elapsed after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the change of the next special symbol without the re-action by the production movable accessory 5100 It will be started.

Here, the technical idea inherent in such a configuration will be described below.
(Technical thought)
A big winning means having a movable body and giving a player an opportunity to obtain a game ball by the operation of the movable body;
With a special map display that changes the special pattern,
A special figure starting port where game balls can be won,
When a game ball is won in the special figure starting opening, a lottery for a big hit is performed, and a control means capable of executing various controls based on the result of the lottery,
Effect display means for performing display effect in a predetermined effect display unit,
A production movable accessory that includes a movable body of the special winning means as one of a plurality of movable parts and is capable of executing a movable production by the plurality of movable components, separately from the display production performed on the predetermined production display unit. And
The control means is
After the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display is finished, a production benefitization control means for creating a production benefitization period in which an opportunity to obtain a game ball can be given to the player,
The control related to the execution of the first special winning prize movable effect in which a plurality of movable parts including the movable body of the special winning means operates, during the effect beneficial period created by the effect beneficial controlling unit can be executed. With a big winning open production control means,
It is possible to execute the control related to the execution of the second special winning movable effect in which only the movable parts other than the movable body of the special winning means operate within the effect beneficial period created by the effect profitable control means. A game machine characterized by comprising: a big winning non-opening production control means.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the small hit can be won by the lottery on the second special symbol side, but for this small hit, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is won. You may

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the big hit is obtained on the second special symbol side, the performance opening operation is performed in the big hit game of the first round in any winning type, but 1 It is also possible to prepare a specific winning type that allows a large amount of prize balls to be obtained by opening for a long time from the round. In other words, in this case, instead of the above-mentioned high expectation production, the big hit design appears when the fluctuation of the design stops, and the big hit game is started under the condition that it is confirmed that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. Should be done.

  In the second embodiment, instead of the special winning opening 2103 of the first embodiment, it is located on the upstream side of the gate portion 2105 and the second starting opening 2102 in the area where the right-handed game ball flows down. The special winning opening 5103 is provided at the position (the position where the front right outside production unit 2700 was provided in the first embodiment), but the special winning opening 2103 and the big winning opening of the first embodiment are provided. Both 5103 and 5103 may be provided. In addition, in the case of the production opening of the first round of the big hit game on the second special symbol side and the production opening at the time of small hit, the big winning opening 5103 as the production movable accessory 5100 is opened. , If the large winning opening 2103 is opened after the second round of the big hit game on the second special symbol side, a part corresponding to the conventional big hit game in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained is directed. Instead of the special winning opening 5103 as the movable accessory 5100, the special winning opening 2103 is opened. Therefore, the effect operation by the special winning opening 5103 as the effect movable winning object 5100 is separated from the game (opening of the special winning opening 2103) corresponding to the conventional big hit game, and this is made to function more suitably as the conventional winning effect. Will be able to.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, in this case as well, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1150 Gaming panel 1900 Liquid crystal display 2000 Table unit 2500 Center accessory 2600 Table right middle rendering unit 2601 Support pin 2610 Table right middle movable ornament 2620A Fixed Decorative body 2623 Light-shielding member 2623a Partition 2625 Front cover (cover)
2626 Performance sheet (picture film, smoked sheet)
2626a Black part (picture film)
2626b Blue part (picture film)
2626c Red part (picture film)
2626d Uncolored part (smoked sheet)
2627 Diffusing lens sheet 2628 Holding member 2640 Table right middle decorative substrate (decorative substrate)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which a game ball is hit by the operation of the player,
A main body frame that detachably supports the game board,
A door frame having a game window in which at least the game area of the game board supported by the main body frame is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the front surface of the main body frame and faces the player side,
Dish light emitting decoration means that is formed below the game window and has a dish portion that bulges forward and can store the game balls, and a light emitting decoration portion that can perform light emission decoration,
A ball feeding unit that sends the game balls stored in the plate portion to a launch position through a passage opening,
Launching means capable of launching the game balls sent to the launching position by the ball feeding unit toward the game area one by one in a launch path ,
First light emitting decoration means which is provided in the vicinity of the plate light emitting decoration means, decorates a predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window, and is capable of emitting light toward the player side,
An area different from the predetermined area on the outer periphery of the game window is decorated, and a second light emitting decoration means having a bulge portion that bulges forward of the first light emission decoration means and is capable of emitting light,
The decoration by the dish light emitting decoration means and the decoration by the second light emitting decoration means form an integral decoration,
The dish light emitting decoration means is formed by bulging further forward than the bulging portion of the second light emitting decoration means,
At least a part of the bulging portion of the second light emitting decoration means is extended to the inside of the game window that allows the game area to be viewed,
The second light emitting decoration means has an inner side surface portion that is easily visible to the player facing the game board, and an outer side surface portion that is difficult to see from the player facing the game board,
The inner side surface portion is decorated in an inclined shape toward the peripheral portion of the game area, and is formed to be a gentle angle compared to the angle of the outer side surface portion toward the main body frame side,
The ball feed unit comprises a fraud prevention member made of a metal plate material,
The metal plate member has a first plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on one side with a predetermined dividing line as a boundary, and a second plate surface portion which is a plate surface portion on the other side with the dividing line as a boundary, The first plate surface portion is bent with respect to the second plate surface portion, and a substantially V-shaped gap that gradually narrows toward the end point of the dividing line is provided between the first plate surface portion and the second plate surface portion. By forming and allowing the wire rod attached to the game ball to enter the gap and cut at the end point of the dividing line, it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts using the wire rod,
The passage opening is an opening formed on the outer surface of the ball feeding unit, and has a first opening having a size through which the game ball can pass and a second opening having a size through which the game ball cannot pass ,
The second opening is an opening formed continuously from the first opening such that the end point of the dividing line is located at the second opening,
The bent first plate surface part of the first plate surface part and the second plate surface part in which the dividing line is located in the second opening and the gap is formed using the dividing line. However, by arranging the metal plate member in the ball feeding unit so that it is closer to the launch passage than the second plate surface portion, the game ball passing through the first opening is the first plate surface portion and the second plate. A game machine characterized in that, in addition to being less likely to collide with the plate surface portion, the wire rod can easily enter the gap .